I N S TA LLAT I ON & OPE RA T ION M A N UA L

SEM V8 SmartStream Encryptor Modulator

Software Version 7.1.x
Replaces: 538074-001-c
 CAUTION
These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only. To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the Installation and Troubleshooting
Instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
SPECIAL SYMBOLS THAT MIGHT APPEAR ON THE EQUIPMENT
This symbol indicates that dangerous voltage levels are present within the equipment.
These voltages are not insulated and may be of sufficient strength to cause serious
bodily injury when touched. The symbol may also appear on schematics.

The exclamation point, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to
the presence of important installation, servicing, and operating instructions in the
documents accompanying the equipment.

For continued protection against fire, replace all fuses only with fuses having the
same electrical ratings marked at the location of the fuse.

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage the SEM unit and circuit card assemblies.
Wear an antistatic wrist strap attached to a chassis ground to prevent ESD damage.

This equipment operates over the marked Voltage and Frequency range without
requiring manual setting of any selector switches. Different types of line cord sets
may be used for connections to the mains supply circuit and should comply with the
electrical code requirements of the country of use. This equipment requires a
grounding conductor in the line cord.

WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE. THE APPARATUS SHALL NOT BE EXPOSED TO DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND NO
OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRICAL SHOCK, IF THIS UNIT IS PROVIDED WITH A POLARIZED
PLUG, DO NOT CONNECT THE PLUG INTO AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE, OR OTHER
OUTLET UNLESS THE PLUG CAN BE FULLY INSERTED WITH NO PART OF THE BLADES EXPOSED.
CAUTION: TO ENSURE REGULATORY AND SAFETY COMPLIANCE, USE ONLY THE PROVIDED
POWER CABLES.
It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device
is connected. This is to avoid damaging the equipment by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
FCC COMPLIANCE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the Installation Manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case

i
 the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense. Any changes or
modifications not expressly approved by Motorola could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment under the rules and regulations of the FCC.
CANADIAN COMPLIANCE
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
FDA COMPLIANCE
This product meets the requirements of the Code of Federal Regulations, Title 21, Chapter I,
Subchapter J, Sections 1010.2, 1010.3, 1040.10, and 1040.11.
IEC COMPLIANCE
This product meets the IEC60825-1 requirements for a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
International Declaration of Conformity
We Motorola, Inc.
101 Tournament Drive
Horsham, PA 19044, U.S.A.
declare under our sole responsibility that the
SmartStream Encryption Modulator v7 Model SEM v7
to which this declaration relates is in conformity with one or more of the following standards:
EMC Standards
EN55022 EN55024 EN55013 EN50083-2 CISPR-22 CISPR-24 CISPR-13
Safety
Standards
EN60065 EN60825 EN50083-1 EN60950 IEC 60950 + A1: 1992 + A2: 1993 + A3: 1995 + A4: 1996

IEC60065
following the provisions of the Directive(s) of the Council of the European Union:
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Directive 93/68/EEC Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC

CARING FOR THE ENVIRONMENT BY RECYCLING

When you see this symbol on a Motorola product, do not dispose of the product with
residential or commercial waste.
Recycling your Motorola Equipment
Please do not dispose of this product with your residential or commercial waste. Some
countries or regions, such as the European Union, have set up systems to collect and
recycle electrical and electronic waste items. Contact your local authorities for
information about practices established for your region. If collection systems are not
available, call Motorola Customer Service for assistance.

ii
 © 2008 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form or
by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation)
without written permission from Motorola, Inc.
Motorola reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes in content from time to time
without obligation on the part of Motorola to provide notification of such revision or change. Motorola
provides this guide without warranty of any kind, implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Motorola may make
improvements or changes in the product(s) described in this manual at any time.
MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office.
MediaCipher is a registered trademark of Motorola. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel
Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT and Windows XP are either trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries. Microsoft product screen
shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation. Sun, Java and all other Java-based marks
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
Netscape Navigator is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. UNIX is a
registered trademark of The Open Group. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Infineon
Technologies is a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG. Finisar is a trademark of the Finisar
Corporation. Optical Communications Products and OCP are trademarks of Optical Communications
Products, Inc. Methode Electronics is a trademark of Methode Electronics, Inc. Agilent Technologies is
a trademark of Agilent Technologies, Inc. The following websites are not sponsored, affiliated, or
controlled by Motorola, Inc.: www.netscape.com, www.microsoft.com, www.infineon.com, www.ocp-
inc.com, www.methode.com, www.agilent.com, www.finisar.com, and www.java.sun.com. All other
product or service names are the property of their respective owners.
© Motorola, Inc. 2008

iii
CONTENTS
1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................1
Using This Manual ....................................................................................................................................3
Related Documentation............................................................................................................................3
Document Conventions ............................................................................................................................4
If You Need Help........................................................................................................................................5
Calling for Repairs.....................................................................................................................................6
2 Overview .........................................................................................................................................................7
SEM Block Diagram Description ............................................................................................................9
SEM Configurations ................................................................................................................................11
SEM System Implementations ..............................................................................................................11
SEM-EM Re-multiplexing Controller.............................................................................................11
SEM-EM Manual Routing Mode for Broadcast Services .........................................................12
SEM-EM UDP Mapping Mode for VOD Systems ........................................................................12
SEM-EM Eight Channel UDP Mapping Mode for VOD Systems...............................................13
SEM-EM Standardized UDP Mapping Mode for VOD Systems ...............................................14
SEM-EM ASI Demultiplexing Mode for Broadcast Systems ....................................................14
Common Tier Encryption (CTE) ......................................................................................................16
DAC 6000 Controlling SEMs in a Broadcast System ..................................................................18
Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) SimulCrypt Operation ..........................................................19
Daisy Chaining SEMs ......................................................................................................................19
Daisy Chain Ethernet Frame Processing Summary....................................................................22
Physical Overview...................................................................................................................................22
Front Panel Indicators and Connectors...............................................................................................23
Input/Output and Power Connectors ...................................................................................................26
3 Installation ....................................................................................................................................................29
Before You Begin.....................................................................................................................................29
Mounting the SEM ..................................................................................................................................30
Installing/Removing GigE SFP Transceivers .......................................................................................31
Connecting the Interface Cables..........................................................................................................32
SEM Power Connection to AC Power..................................................................................................32
SEM Power Connection to DC Power..................................................................................................33
Confirming SEM Power-on Sequencing..............................................................................................33
4 Setup and Operation ...................................................................................................................................35
Network Connection...............................................................................................................................35
Verifying the Network Connection .......................................................................................................35
SEM–EM Requirements .........................................................................................................................35
v
CONTENTS

Browsers........................................................................................................................................... 36
Hardware .......................................................................................................................................... 36
Operating Systems .......................................................................................................................... 36
Initiating an SEM-EM Session .............................................................................................................. 37
SEM-EM Software Toolset .................................................................................................................... 40
System ...................................................................................................................................................... 42
Reboot ............................................................................................................................................... 43
Administration.................................................................................................................................. 43
Setting ............................................................................................................................................... 44
About ................................................................................................................................................. 45
Exit ..................................................................................................................................................... 45
Configuration.................................................................................................................................... 46
SEM System Configuration — SEM Device Operating Mode ......................................................... 48
SEM System Configuration — System Time....................................................................................... 49
SEM System Configuration — Ethernet....................................................................................... 51
SEM System Configuration — Ethernet — Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration.............. 54
SEM System Configuration — Command Interface.......................................................................... 56
Multi-controller Log................................................................................................................................ 58
SEM System Configuration — EAS...................................................................................................... 59
SEM System Configuration — Traps ................................................................................................... 61
SEM System Configuration — Advanced ........................................................................................... 63
SEM System Configuration — PID Remapping .......................................................................... 67
SEM Input/Output Configuration — ASI Ports ................................................................................... 70
SEM Input/Output Configuration — Gigabit Ethernet ....................................................................... 72
SEM Input/Output Configuration — Gigabit Ethernet Interface Redundancy .............................. 75
GigE Routing Table Configuration ................................................................................................. 77
GigE Static ARP Table Configuration ............................................................................................ 79
GigE Input UDP Configuration........................................................................................................ 80
GigE MPTS Redundancy........................................................................................................................ 81
GigE MPTS Redundancy Processing ........................................................................................... 82
GigE Input Stream Status Monitoring........................................................................................... 82
GigE Input Stream Low Bit Rate Alarm ........................................................................................ 83
GigE MPTS Alarms and Traps........................................................................................................ 83
Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Status Window................................................................................ 87
Commanded Gigabit Ethernet UDP Status .................................................................................. 90
Error Log Window............................................................................................................................ 93
IGMP Configuration......................................................................................................................... 94
Gigabit Ethernet VLAN/CFM Configuration ................................................................................. 96
vi
CONTENTS

Gigabit Ethernet VLAN/CFM Status ..............................................................................................98

SEM Input/Output Configuration — Advanced.........................................................................101
PSIP Configuration................................................................................................................................103
SimulCrypt Configuration..............................................................................................................105
SimulCrypt Configuration — SimulCrypt MUX-EMMG Stream Status..................................111
QAM and Up Converter Configuration........................................................................................112
Output Transport Stream Configuration .....................................................................................118
Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring .......................................................................131
VOD Control............................................................................................................................................135
SEM VOD Control — Manual Routing ........................................................................................136
Manual Routing Mapping Restrictions.......................................................................................139
Example of Manually Configuring the SEM-EM for Remultiplexing.......................................139
SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping............................................................................................142
SEM UDP Mapping Example........................................................................................................146
SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP Mapping ...................................................................148
ASI Demultiplexing Configuration ...............................................................................................153
SEM VOD Control — 8 Channel UDP Mapping ................................................................................156
SEM VOD Control — Ancillary PID Routing...............................................................................161
CTE Configuration and Status Windows ....................................................................................164
ICE Program Status........................................................................................................................169
SEM VOD Control — ICE EMM Configuration...........................................................................172
Status ......................................................................................................................................................181
Status — Alarms............................................................................................................................182
Status — Events ............................................................................................................................192
Status — Temperature and Fan...................................................................................................194
Status — Load SEM Command Status.......................................................................................195
Status — Output Program Status................................................................................................197
Status — SEM PSI Table ..............................................................................................................207
Status — Hardware Error Log .....................................................................................................209
Status — Invalid Init Data Errors ................................................................................................210
Status — SEM Version and MCNs..............................................................................................211
Host Packets Statistics — Packet Insertion Statistics............................................................214
Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Packet Statistics...............................................................216
Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Input Statistics..................................................................218
GigE Packet Statistics — GigE Output Packet Statistics ........................................................220
GigE Packet Statistics — GigE Frame Counter Statistics .......................................................222
GigE Packet Statistics — GigE Frame Buffer Status................................................................224
Status — Save Entire SEM Status ..............................................................................................238
vii
CONTENTS

5 SEM Verification........................................................................................................................................ 239

6 Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................................... 241
SEM LED/Error Indications.................................................................................................................. 241
Appendix A — Specifications.................................................................................................................... 245
Physical Dimensions ............................................................................................................................ 245
Electrical Specifications for AC Input ............................................................................................... 245
Electrical Specifications for DC Input ............................................................................................... 246
Operating Environment ........................................................................................................................ 246
ASI Interface ......................................................................................................................................... 247
OAM&P and IP Data 10/100Base-T Ethernet Interfaces ................................................................ 247
GigE Interface........................................................................................................................................ 247
RF Interface (Optional QAM-UC Module) ......................................................................................... 248
Appendix B — Cabling Specifications and Approved SFP Transceiver Vendors.............................. 251
Ethernet 10/100Base-T Interface Cabling ......................................................................................... 251
RS-232 Interface Cabling ..................................................................................................................... 251
RF Cabling .............................................................................................................................................. 252
Certified SEM V8 SFP Transceiver Vendors...................................................................................... 252
Appendix C — Initialization Information................................................................................................... 253
Self-Boot Initialization.......................................................................................................................... 253
External Initialization from a LAN Resident BOOTP or DHCP Server ........................................... 253
BOOTP Request and Reply Format..................................................................................................... 255
BOOTP Request ............................................................................................................................. 255
BOOTP Server Reply ..................................................................................................................... 255
Typical SEM BOOTP Packet Files ............................................................................................... 255
Reference Specifications............................................................................................................. 256
HCT 1000 as BOOTP Server................................................................................................................. 256
Appendix D — Field Fan Replacement Procedure ................................................................................. 259
Fan Removal .......................................................................................................................................... 259
Replacement Fan Kit Assemblies....................................................................................................... 260
Fan Replacement .................................................................................................................................. 261
Appendix E — RS-232 Test/Console Port ................................................................................................. 263
Establishing Communication with a PC............................................................................................. 263
Menu General Operations ................................................................................................................... 263
User Console Root Menu..................................................................................................................... 266
Show Enet1 Parameters Menu (Root.1) ............................................................................................ 266
Enet1 IP Setup (Fixed Config) Menu (Root.2).................................................................................... 267
Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols) Menu (Root.3).......................................................................... 267
Destructive Purge Menu (Root.4)....................................................................................................... 268
viii
CONTENTS

REPROGRAM ACP FPGA MENU (ROOT.5)..................................................................................269

Show ACP Unit Addresses Menu (Root.6) .................................................................................269
Reset SEM EM User Name and Password Menu (Root.7)......................................................269
Typical Scenarios..................................................................................................................................269
Setup for DHCP or BOOTP Client Configuration........................................................................269
Fixed IP Configuration ...................................................................................................................269
Glossary .........................................................................................................................................................271
Abbreviations and Acronyms ..............................................................................................................271
Definitions of Terms ..............................................................................................................................276

Figure 1-1 SmartStream Encryptor Modulator (SEM).................................................................................2

Figure 2-1 SEM block diagram........................................................................................................................9
Figure 2-2 Typical example of SEM-EM Control (UDP Mapping or Manual Routing)..........................16
Figure 2-3 Typical example of DAC 6000 controlling SEMs in a broadcast system .............................18
Figure 2-4 Two SEM daisy chains ................................................................................................................20
Figure 2-5 SEM with loop through interface ..............................................................................................21
Figure 2-6 SEM with LT terminator interface .............................................................................................21
Figure 2-7 SEM dimensions...........................................................................................................................23
Figure 2-8 Front panel indicators and connectors ....................................................................................24
Figure 2-9 SEM rear panel ............................................................................................................................26
Figure 3-1 Rack mounting..............................................................................................................................30
Figure 3-2 Typical SFP transceiver installation/removal ..........................................................................31
Figure 3-3 SEM rear panel I/O cable connectors......................................................................................32
Figure 4-1 Initiating an SEM-EM session....................................................................................................37
Figure 4-2 File download pop-up..................................................................................................................37
Figure 4-3 SEM Element Manager Login window .....................................................................................38
Figure 4-4 Incorrect password error popup...............................................................................................38
Figure 4-5 Alarms window ............................................................................................................................39
Figure 4-6 SEM_EM Main window ..............................................................................................................40
Figure 4-7 System drop-down list as user “root” ......................................................................................42
Figure 4-8 System drop-down list as other user........................................................................................42
Figure 4-9 Reboot SEM popup ......................................................................................................................43
Figure 4-10 Administration window .............................................................................................................43
Figure 4-11 Set Password window ..............................................................................................................44
Figure 4-12 About popup ...............................................................................................................................45
Figure 4-13 Exit popup....................................................................................................................................45
Figure 4-14 Configuration drop-down list ...................................................................................................46
Figure 4-15 SEM Device Operating Mode panel .......................................................................................48
ix
CONTENTS

Figure 4-16 System Time window ................................................................................................................ 49

Figure 4-17 Ethernet window........................................................................................................................ 52
Figure 4-18 Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration window .................................................................... 54
Figure 4-19 Command Interface window.................................................................................................... 56
Figure 4-20 Multi-controller Log .................................................................................................................. 58
Figure 4-21 EAS window ............................................................................................................................... 60
Figure 4-22 Traps window ............................................................................................................................. 62
Figure 4-23 Advanced window..................................................................................................................... 64
Figure 4-24 PID Remapping window ........................................................................................................... 67
Figure 4-25 ASI Ports window...................................................................................................................... 70
Figure 4-26 Gigabit Ethernet window .......................................................................................................... 72
Figure 4-27 Gigabit Ethernet window with Interface Redundancy enabled ......................................... 75
Figure 4-28 GigE Routing Table Configuration window ............................................................................ 77
Figure 4-29 GigE Static ARP Table Configuration window....................................................................... 79
Figure 4-30 GigE Input UDP Configuration Window.................................................................................. 80
Figure 4-31 Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Configuration Window ............................................................. 84
Figure 4-32 Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Status Window.......................................................................... 88
Figure 4-33 Commanded Gigabit Ethernet UDP Status Window............................................................. 91
Figure 4-34 Error Log Window...................................................................................................................... 93
Figure 4-35 IGMP Configuration Window................................................................................................... 94
Figure 4-36 Gigabit Ethernet Multicast Advanced Configuration window............................................ 95
Figure 4-37 Add VLAN/CFM window ........................................................................................................... 96
Figure 4-38 VLAN/CFM Status window....................................................................................................... 98
Figure 4-39 SEM Input/Output Configuration — Advanced window ................................................... 101
Figure 4-40 PSIP Configuration window ................................................................................................... 103
Figure 4-41 SimulCrypt Configuration — General window.................................................................... 105
Figure 4-42 SimulCrypt Configuration — SCS-ECMG window.............................................................. 106
Figure 4-43 SimulCrypt Configuration — EMMG-Mux window ............................................................ 109
Figure 4-44 SimulCrypt MUX-EMMG Stream Status window ............................................................... 111
Figure 4-45 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration — Annex B (DCII) window................................. 112
Figure 4-46 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration — Annex A (DVB) window................................. 113
Figure 4-47 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration — Annex C window ............................................ 114
Figure 4-48 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Cable Encryption (or SimulCrypt) window 118
Figure 4-49 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Manual Routing window ............................. 120
Figure 4-50 Output Transport Stream Configuration — UDP Mapping window................................. 123
Figure 4-51 Output Transport Stream Configuration — ASI Demultiplexing window ....................... 125
Figure 4-52 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Standardized UDP Port Mapping mode
window .......................................................................................................................................................... 127

x
CONTENTS

Figure 4-53 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Eight Channel UDP Mapping window .......129
Figure 4-54 Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring window ..................................................131
Figure 4-55 VOD control drop-down list....................................................................................................135
Figure 4-56 SEM VOD Control — Manual Routing window ...................................................................136
Figure 4-57 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping window.......................................................................142
Figure 4-58 SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP Mapping window..............................................148
Figure 4-59 ASI Demultiplexing Configuration window ..........................................................................153
Figure 4-60 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping (8 Channel) window .................................................156
Figure 4-61 SEM VOD Control — Ancillary PID Routing.........................................................................161
Figure 4-62 SEM Element Manager VOD Control ....................................................................................164
Figure 4-63 SEM ICE Program Configuration ...........................................................................................165
Figure 4-64 ICE Program Status..................................................................................................................169
Figure 4-65 ICE EMM Configuration window ...........................................................................................172
Figure 4-66 ICE EMM Status window ........................................................................................................174
Figure 4-67 Status drop-down list ..............................................................................................................181
Figure 4-68 Alarms and Events window....................................................................................................182
Figure 4-69 Events window .........................................................................................................................192
Figure 4-70 Temperature and Fan ..............................................................................................................194
Figure 4-71 Load SEM Command Status window....................................................................................195
Figure 4-72 Output Program Status window without encryption status..............................................198
Figure 4-73 Output Program Status window with encryption status....................................................198
Figure 4-74 SimulCrypt SCS Program Status window.............................................................................203
Figure 4-75 Insertion Queue Table window ..............................................................................................205
Figure 4-76 SEM PSI Table window...........................................................................................................207
Figure 4-77 Hardware Error Log window..................................................................................................209
Figure 4-78 Invalid Initialization Data Errors window .............................................................................210
Figure 4-79 Version and MCN Window .....................................................................................................211
Figure 4-80 ACP FPGA reprogramming warning pop-up........................................................................213
Figure 4-81 Host Packets Statistics — Packet Insertion Statistics window.......................................214
Figure 4-82 Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Packet Statistics.........................................................216
Figure 4-83 Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Input Statistics window.............................................218
Figure 4-84 GigE Output Packet Statistics window .................................................................................220
Figure 4-85 GigE Frame Counter Statistics window ................................................................................222
Figure 4-86 GigE Frame Buffer Status Window........................................................................................225
Figure 4-87 GigE Routing Table Status window .......................................................................................228
Figure 4-88 GigE ARP Table Status window .............................................................................................230
Figure 4-89 GigE Loop Through Terminator Status window...................................................................232
Figure 4-90 ISA SDV Sessions Window ....................................................................................................234
xi
CONTENTS

Figure 4-91 ISA SDV GigE UDP Status Window ...................................................................................... 236
Figure 4-92 ISA SDV QAM Window........................................................................................................... 237
Figure 4-93 Save SEM Status window ...................................................................................................... 238
Figure D-1 Fan removal/replacement........................................................................................................ 260
Figure D-2 Fan kit assemblies .................................................................................................................... 260
Figure E-1 Menu selections 1 through 3 ................................................................................................... 264
Figure E-2 Menu selections 4 through 7 ................................................................................................... 265

Table 2-1 SEM block diagram descriptions.................................................................................................. 9

Table 2-2 SEM Configurations ...................................................................................................................... 11
Table 2-3 Ethernet frame processing summary......................................................................................... 22
Table 2-4 SEM front panel connectors and indicators............................................................................. 24
Table 2-5 SEM rear panel connectors ........................................................................................................ 26
Table 4-1 System Time window field definitions........................................................................................ 50
Table 4-2 Ethernet window field definitions............................................................................................... 52
Table 4-3 Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration window field definitions............................................ 55
Table 4-4 Command Interface window field definitions........................................................................... 57
Table 4-5 EAS window field definitions....................................................................................................... 61
Table 4-6 Traps window field definitions .................................................................................................... 62
Table 4-7 Advanced window field definitions ............................................................................................ 65
Table 4-8 PID Remapping Definitions.......................................................................................................... 67
Table 4-9 ASI Ports window field definitions ............................................................................................. 71
Table 4-10 Gigabit Ethernet window field definitions ............................................................................... 73
Table 4-11 Redundant Gigabit Ethernet window field definitions........................................................... 76
Table 4-12 GigE Routing Table Configuration window field definitions.................................................. 78
Table 4-13 GigE Static ARP Table Configuration window field definitions ............................................ 80
Table 4-14 GigE Input UDP Configuration field definitions....................................................................... 81
Table 4-15 GigE Ethernet Input UDP Configuration Window field definitions....................................... 85
Table 4-16 GigE Ethernet Input UDP Status Window field definitions ................................................... 89
Table 4-17 Commanded Gigabit Ethernet UDP Status window field definitions................................... 92
Table 4-18 Error Log Window ....................................................................................................................... 93
Table 4-19 Gigabit Ethernet Multicast Advanced Configuration window field definitions ................. 95
Table 4-20 Gigabit VLAN/CFM Configuration window field definitions.................................................. 97
Table 4-21 Gigabit VLAN/CFM Status window field definitions .............................................................. 99
Table 4-22 SEM Input/Output Configuration — Advanced window field definitions......................... 102
Table 4-23 PSIP Configuration window field definitions ........................................................................ 104
Table 4-25 SimulCrypt Configuration — General window field definitions ......................................... 105
Table 4-26 SimulCrypt Configuration–SCS — ECMG window field definitions .................................. 106
xii
CONTENTS

Table 4-27 SimulCrypt Configuration — EMMG-Mux window field definitions..................................109

Table 4-28 SimulCrypt MUX — EMMG Stream Status window field definitions................................111
Table 4-29 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration windows field definitions .....................................114
Table 4-30 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Cable Encryption (or SimulCrypt) window field
definitions ......................................................................................................................................................119
Table 4-31 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Manual Routing window field definitions...121
Table 4-32 Output Transport Stream Configuration — UDP Mapping window field definitions ......123
Table 4-33 Output Transport Stream Configuration — ASI Demultiplexing window field definitions126
Table 4-34 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Standardized UDP Port Mapping mode window
field definitions..............................................................................................................................................128
Table 4-35 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Eight Channel UDP Mapping window field
definitions ......................................................................................................................................................130
Table 4-36 Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring window field definitions .......................132
Table 4-37 SEM VOD Control — Manual Routing window field definitions ........................................137
Table 4-38 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping window field definitions............................................143
Table 4-39 Example of UDP mapping with port offset of 0 .....................................................................146
Table 4-40 SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP Mapping window field definitions ...................149
Table 4-41 Example of Standardized UDP mapping with relative 1 transport stream index.............152
Table 4-42 ASI Demultiplexing Configuration window field definitions ...............................................154
Table 4-43 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping (8 Channel) window field definitions.......................157
Table 4-44 Typical example of mapped UDP port bits 15 through 8......................................................159
Table 4-45 Typical example of mapped UDP port bits 7 through 0........................................................160
Table 4-46 SEM VOD Control — Ancillary PID Routing window field definitions...............................162
Table 4-47 ICE Program Configuration ......................................................................................................166
Table 4-48 ICE Program Status window field definitions........................................................................170
Table 4-49 ICE EMM Configuration definitions.........................................................................................173
Table 4-50 ICE EMM Status definitions .....................................................................................................175
Table 4-51 EMMS Client Errors...................................................................................................................177
Table 4-52 EMMS Server Errors.................................................................................................................178
Table 4-53 EMMS Timeout Error.................................................................................................................180
Table 4-54 Alarms window field definitions..............................................................................................183
Table 4-55 Events window field definitions...............................................................................................193
Table 4-56 Temperature and Fan window field definitions.....................................................................194
Table 4-57 Load SEM Command Status window field definitions .........................................................196
Table 4-58 Output Program Status window field definitions..................................................................199
Table 4-59 SimulCrypt Configuration — Status window field definitions ............................................204
Table 4-60 Insertion Queue Table window field definitions ...................................................................206
Table 4-61 SEM PSI Table window field definitions ................................................................................208

xiii
CONTENTS

Table 4-62 Hardware Error Log window field definitions....................................................................... 209

Table 4-63 Invalid Initialization Data Errors window field definitions .................................................. 210
Table 4-64 SEM Version and MCNs window field definitions ............................................................... 212
Table 4-65 Host Packets Statistics — Packet Insertion Statistics window field definitions ........... 215
Table 4-66 Host IP Packet Statistics window field definitions .............................................................. 217
Table 4-67 Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Input Statistics window field definitions.................. 219
Table 4-68 GigE Output Packet Statistics window field definitions...................................................... 221
Table 4-69 GigE Frame Counter Statistics window field definitions..................................................... 223
Table 4-70 GigE Frame Buffer Status Table .............................................................................................. 226
Table 4-71 GigE Routing Table Status window field definitions ............................................................ 229
Table 4-72 GigE ARP Table Status window field definitions .................................................................. 231
Table 4-73 GigE Loop Through Terminator Status window field definitions........................................ 233
Table 4-74 ISA SDV Sessions window field definitions.......................................................................... 234
Table 4-75 ISA SDV GigE UDP Status Window field definitions............................................................ 236
Table 4-76 ISA SDV QAM Window field definitions ................................................................................ 237
Table 6-1 SEM LED/Error Conditions ......................................................................................................... 241
Table B-1 Ethernet 10Base-T interface connector pin-out.................................................................... 251
Table B-2 RS-232 interface connector pin-out ........................................................................................ 252
Table C-1 HCT 1000 SEM parameters........................................................................................................ 257

xiv
1 INTRODUCTION
The Motorola® SmartStream Encryptor Modulator (SEM) v8 fulfills the throughput
demands of broadcast stream intensive and VOD dedicated stream topologies. The
SEM provides re-multiplexing, real time encryption, QAM modulation and
upconversion capabilities in a high density one rack unit (RU) form factor. Its MPEG
routing I/O architecture, consisting of three Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, eight
Asynchronous Serial Interfaces (ASIs), and four RF interfaces (requires optional
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation/Up Converter [QAM/UC] module), enable it to
redirect services present from any input into any output. These interfaces are
supplemented by two 10/100Base-T Ethernet interfaces that provide
management/control communication with a SEM controller and insertion of
pre-packetized MPEG data or IP datagrams into output transport streams.
Unique attributes of the SEM include:
• Two input power versions (AC and DC).
• Three Gigabit Ethernet interfaces (GigE1-3), each of which can accept a Small
Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) module as defined in Appendix B, “Cabling
Specifications and Approved SFP Transceiver Vendors.”
• Three full duplex Gigabit Ethernet Interfaces compliant with IEEE 802.3z.
• Eight software configurable input ASIs (ASI1-8), of which four (ASI5-8) can be
configured as either inputs or outputs.
• Two 10/100Base-T Ethernet interfaces (ENET1 and ENET2) compliant with IEEE
802.3u.
• Network Protocols (interface dependent) consisting of: IP/ICMP/IGMP at the
Network Layer, UDP/TCP at the Transport Layer, and SNMP, DHCP, BOOTP, TFTP,
SNTP, and HTTP at the Application Layer.
• MPEG transport stream reception and transmission over Gigabit Ethernet or ASI.
• Creation of up to 16 Multi-Program Transport Stream (MPTS) outputs.
• Generation of up to eight QAM signals on four F-type connector outputs (dual
upconversion with two adjacent QAM channels per RF port) that comply with
North American and International standards.
• Creation of up to four output MPTSs, over ASI, at rates up to 206 Mbps.
• Creation of up to 16 output MPTSs, over Gigabit Ethernet, which can be
transmitted to up to sixteen different destination IP addresses.
• Input program specific information (PSI) extraction for internal processing and
display to the operator.
• Output PSI and conditional access (CA) message insertion.
• PID re-mapping and MPEG service number (SN) re-mapping to prevent
component PID and SN conflicts within an output transport stream.
1
1 INTRODUCTION

• DCII encryption using Data Encryption Standard (DES) or Common Scrambling

Algorithm (CSA). Encryption requires an optional ACP module.
• SimulCrypt encryption processing (encryption requires an optional ACP module).
• Multi-Protocol Encapsulation (MPE) and insertion of IP datagram streams.
• In-band MPEG data insertion.
• ASI Monitor Port output.
The SEM can be configured and monitored remotely using the SEM Element
Manager (SEM-EM), which uses a JAVA™-enabled console. This console is a remote
user interface based on a JAVA application that is initially invoked from the host
computer. Once invoked, the console can access any SEM on the system, as
determined by the IP address.
The SEM-EM can function as the SEM controller in applications where encryption is
not required. The SEM-EM provides manual re-multiplexing control that allows an
operator to route input MPEG services from any input transport stream to any
output transport stream. A second mode, UDP Port Mapping, is provided when
receiving SPTSs from the Gigabit Ethernet. This mode provides for the autonomous
routing of SPTSs to the appropriate output, based on the destination UDP port of the
received UDP segment stream carrying the SPTS. A third mode, ASI auto
de-multiplexing, reduces SEM-EM configuration and provisioning necessary to
support the reception and re-multiplexing of a high speed transport stream
containing a large number of services.
Figure 1-1 illustrates the SEM front panel.
Figure 1-1 SmartStream Encryptor Modulator (SEM)

ASI GigE Enet

ASI
RS-232 Test Port
Status 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2
SEM v8 Monitor
5 4 3 2 1
SmartStream Encryptor Modulator ASI Port
MONITOR
9 8 7 6

2
1 INTRODUCTION

Using This Manual

The following sections provide information and instructions to install, configure, and
operate the SEM.
Section Title and Purpose

Section 1 Introduction provides a product description, related documentation, the

technical help line, and repair/return information.

Section 2 Overview provides functional and physical descriptions of the SEM.

Section 3 Installation provides instructions on how to install the SEM.

Section 4 Setup and Operation provides instructions on how to set up and operate the
SEM.

Section 5 SEM Verification provides procedural steps to verify SEM configuration

settings using the SEM-EM.

Section 6 Troubleshooting provides information to help isolate and resolve possible

error conditions.

Appendix A Specifications provides the technical specifications for the SEM.

Appendix B Cabling Specifications provides cable specifications and a list of approved

vendors for Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) tranceivers.

Appendix C Initialization Information provides special information on the SEM

initialization process.

Appendix D Fan Field Replacement Procedure provides instructions to replace a

malfunctioning SEM fan.

Appendix E Test Console Port provides an alternate method to configure the SEM IP
address in lieu of a BOOTP server or DHCP server. It also provides menus to
view SEM network settings and various menu selections to reboot the unit.

Glossary The Glossary provides the full spelling of the abbreviations, acronyms, and
definitions of the special terms used in this manual. Related Documentation

Related Documentation
The Headend Configuration Tool User Guide might be of assistance when installing
the SEM.

3
1 INTRODUCTION

Document Conventions
Before you begin using the SEM, familiarize yourself with the stylistic conventions
used in this manual:
Bold type Indicates text that you must type exactly as it
appears or indicates a default value.

SILK SCREEN Denotes silk screening on the equipment,

typically representing front- and rear-panel
controls and input/output (I/O) connections,
and LEDs.

* (asterisk) Indicates that several versions of the same

model number exist and the information
applies to all models; when the information
applies to a specific model, the complete
model number is given.

Variable Denotes a displayed variable, a variable that

you must type, or is used for emphasis.

BUTTON + BUTTON Button combinations indicating that you must

press both buttons simultaneously.

KEY + KEY Key combinations indicating that you hold

down the first key and then press the second
key.

KEY, KEY Key combinations indicating that you press the

first key, release it, and then press the second
key.
System Output Indicates displayed text.

^ (caret) Indicates the spacebar is pressed when

keyboarding command line input.

SEM Abbreviation for SmartStream Encryptor

Modulator v8.

> Points to next window in navigation paths.

4
1 INTRODUCTION

If You Need Help

If you need assistance while working with this product, contact the Motorola
Technical Response Center (TRC):
• Inside the U.S.: 1-888-944-HELP (1-888-944-4357), option 1–4, then option 1–5
• Outside the U.S.: 1-215-323-0044
• Motorola Online: http://businessonline.motorola.com
The TRC is on call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. In addition, Motorola Online offers
a searchable solutions database, technical documentation, and low-priority issue
creation and tracking

Technical Response Center

Telephone Menu Options Connected Home Solutions

888-944-HELP / 215-323-0044 http://businessonline.motorola.com

Broadcaster,
Video Products Satellite IRD or
PRESS 1 Encoder Products
PRESS 2

PRESS 1 PRESS 2 PRESS 3 PRESS 1 PRESS 2

Controllers Headend Set-tops Commercial Uplink
IRD Encoder

PRESS 1 PRESS 2
Digital Analog

Data Networks/ Consumer

Transmission Products Products
PRESS 3 PRESS 4

PRESS 1 PRESS 2 PRESS 3 PRESS 4 PRESS 5 PRESS 1 PRESS 2

Cable Router Cable Modems Transmission Network Multiservice Consumer Broadband
Products VOIP Products Management Transport Satellite Retail
Products C Band Support
(MBT/MWT/MEA)
Severity Level PRESS 1 PRESS 2
Network Network
1 - Critical Failure Licensing Management
2 - Serious Failure Products
3 - Lesser Failure
4 - Technical Assistance
Issued: 04/2005

5
1 INTRODUCTION

Calling for Repairs

If repair is necessary, call the Motorola Repair Facility at 1-800-642-0442 for a Return
for Service Authorization (RSA) number before sending the unit. The RSA number
must be prominently displayed on all equipment cartons. The Repair Facility is open
from 7:00 AM to 4:00 PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday.
When calling from outside the United States, use the appropriate international
access code and then call 52-631-311-1100 to contact the Repair Facility.
When shipping equipment for repair, follow these steps:
1. Pack the unit securely.
2. Complete and enclose the checklist provided with the unit.
3. Enclose a copy of the invoice that verifies the warranty status.
4. Ship the unit PREPAID to the following address:
Motorola, Inc.
Connected Home Solutions
c/o Excel
Attn: RSA #_________
6908 East Century Park Drive
Suite 100
Tucson, AZ 85706

6
2 OVERVIEW
There are three Gigabit Ethernet (GigE 1-3) interfaces within the SEM, any of which
can receive or transmit MPEG transport streams. Each GigE interface allows a Small
Form Factor Pluggable (SFP) module to be inserted. SFP modules come in a variety
of ITU Grid 100 GHz Spacing wavelengths for connection to passive or transponder
networks and switched or routed Gigabit Ethernet networks. The SFP module can be
selected based on the output wavelength desired (for example, 850 nm, 1310 nm,
1550 nm, etc.). An electrical 1000Base-T SFP module can also be accommodated if
required.
The SEM provides eight ASI interfaces that are demultiplexing capable. Each of
these ASI interfaces can accept a single Multi-Program Transport Stream (MPTS) at a
sustained input information rate up to 213 Mbps. Four of the eight ASI interfaces
(ASI 5-8) can be configured as inputs or outputs. When configured as outputs, the
sustained output information rate can be configured up to 206 Mbps. Configuration
of each of the ASI interfaces is under software control through the SEM-EM.
An eight-channel QAM/UC module is available that contains eight QAM modulators
and four dual-channel RF upconverters. Each upconverter places two QAM outputs
into two adjacent RF channels. The QAM Module supports
ITU-T J.83 Annex A (DVB), Annex B (ATSC/DCII), and Annex C (International)
modulation modes.
The SEM v8 is capable of receiving an aggregate input MPEG information rate of up
to 900 Mbps across all of its inputs and producing an aggregate output MPEG
information rate of up to 848 Mbps across all of its outputs. Note that the aggregate
output information rate is lower than the aggregate input rate because the SEM v8
can produce a maximum of 16 output MPTSs at a maximum output information rate
of 53Mbps per MPTS.
Both Single Program Transport Streams (SPTSs) and MPTSs are valid inputs to the
Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. The SEM can re-multiplex SPTSs into one or more MPTS
and de-multiplex a single large MPTS into multiple smaller MPTSs. The destination
UDP port number, in the header of each received UDP segment, can be used in UDP
Mapping mode to route an SPTS or MPTS to a particular output multiplex. The ability
to route specific MPEG services within an MPTS is also supported. Here, the
destination UDP port and MPEG service number of the desired service are specified
by the operator to configure routing to the particular output multiplex.
MPEG services from the Gigabit Ethernet and ASI inputs can be multiplexed
together to produce up to 16 outgoing MPTSs. Of these, up to eight MPTSs can be
QAM modulated and upconverted to RF. Simultaneously or alternatively, the SEM
can transmit MPTSs out the ASI or Gigabit Ethernet outputs.
The SEM inserts the requisite PSI into each newly created output MPTS. PID
re-mapping and MPEG Service Number re-mapping can be performed to prevent
PID and service number conflicts as a result of re-multiplexing.

7
2 OVERVIEW

An optional Access Control Processor (ACP) Module is available that allows full
MediaCipher encryption of up to 128 MPEG services, each with up to 16 component
PID streams on average. The ACP Module supports both DES and CSA encryption
algorithms.
The SEM can operate in a SimulCrypt system and therefore supports the various
SimulCrypt protocols. It provides the functionality of a Control Word Generator
(CWG), SimulCrypt Synchronizer (SCS), Multiplexer (MUX), Scrambler (SCR), and
Motorola Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG). The SEM can receive
Entitlement Control Messages (ECMs) from third party ECMGs for insertion into an
output multiplex, as well as Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) from
external Entitlement Management Message Generators (EMMGs).
The SEM also has two 10/100Base-T Fast Ethernet interfaces (ENET1 and ENET2).
ENET1 is the OAM&P management/control interface. This interface is used to
communicate with a SEM controller. The SEM controller can be a DAC 6000 or
SEM-EM, depending on the intended use of the device. ENET2 is the IP data
interface. This interface is intended for connection to a customer’s Application
Network. Third party devices can use this interface to deliver pre-packetized MPEG
data or IP datagrams that are to be inserted into an output transport stream.

8
2 OVERVIEW

SEM Block Diagram Description

Figure 2-1 is an illustrated block diagram of the SEM. Table 2-1 describes the SEM
interfaces and optional modules shown in the block diagram illustration.
Figure 2-1 SEM block diagram

TS16 TS4

Ethernet

.…
Gigabit Ethernet

Mux
Transceiver A
TS1
GigE-3 ( Optional ) QAM/UC module
Optical TS1
Module QAM-1A
TS9 Dual UC RF-1
#1

Message/PID stream
Insertion Processing
QAM-1B
Gigabit Ethernet TS1 TS1 TS1 TS10
Ethernet Demux

Processing
Extraction
Message
Transceiver
….

….

….
QAM-2A

…...
Service
TS11 Dual UC RF-2

Mux
GigE-2 MPEG Router
Optical TS16 TS16 TS16 #2
QAM-2B
Module TS12

….
QAM-3A
TS13 Dual UC RF-3
Gigabit Ethernet #3
QAM-3B
Transceiver TS14
GigE-1 QAM-4A
Optical TS15 Dual UC RF-4
Module #4
QAM-4B
TS16
ASI-1 ASI
TS1 TS16 TS1 TS16
ASI-2 ASI ….. …..
ASI-3 ASI TS1
ASI Demux

Processing
Extraction
Message

ASI-4 ASI
TS16
ASI
ASI Monitor
ACP
Interface Port

ASI-5 ASI

ASI-6 ASI
A
ASI-7 ASI Processor Relay Alarm

ASI-8 ASI

IP Data OAM&P Test/

Interface Interface Console
10/100 BaseT 10/100 BaseT Port

Table 2-1 SEM block diagram descriptions

Block Diagram Item Description

GigE 1-3 All three GigE transceivers can transmit and receive MPEG transport
streams; however, two (GigE-2 and GigE-3) are normally used to receive
transport streams from headend devices, for example a VOD server. VOD
systems require high-speed capabilities, as a large number of transport
streams are implemented to establish dedicated sessions to each subscriber
set-top. The other transceiver (GigE-1) is used to transport encrypted streams
to the distribution network. The distribution network can implement Dense
Wave Division Multiplexing (DWDM), Synchronous Optical Network (SONET),
and Switched Ethernet transport technologies. (Some GigE interface SFP
Modules can be provided by Motorola; see Appendix B “Cabling
Specifications and Approved SFP Transceiver Vendors.”)
Two (GigE-1 and GigE-2) of the three GigE transceivers have loop-through
capabilities.

ASI 1-8 ASI 1-4 are dedicated inputs only. ASI-5 through ASI-8 can be configured as
inputs or outputs under software control. The ASIs can carry a single
Multi-Program Transport Stream (MPTS) at an input rate up to 213 Mbps and
an output rate of up to 206 Mbps.

9
2 OVERVIEW

Block Diagram Item Description

ACP Two optional ACP encryption modules are available for full DCII encryption
and SimulCrypt processing with a Motorola controller:
• MediaCipher (MC) – Provides full DCII encryption for up to 128 services
using embedded MC encryption processors. Both DES and CSA
scrambling modes are supported.
• MC and SimulCrypt – For use in SimulCrypt systems with a Motorola
Controller (DAC 6000). Provides for scrambling of up to 128 services using
CSA encryption engine functionality. Provides for SimulCrypt Control Word
(CW) generation under the control of an SCS.
MPEG Router The MPEG Router enables output transport streams to be redirected through
the ACP bank and back out its baseband output(s) such as the GigE or ASI, or
out to the QAM/UC module.

QAM/UC Module An optional eight channel QAM/UC module is available. The QAM/UC module
outputs eight QAM RF carriers through four connectors. Each of the four
connectors outputs a pair of RF QAM carriers on adjacent channels.

OAM&P Interface A 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface that receives remultiplexing, message

10/100Base-T extraction, message insertion, and encryption commands from an external
controller. It can operate in half and full duplex modes.

IP Data Interface This Ethernet 10/100Base-T interface can receive pre-packetized MPEG
10/100Base-T packets from the UDP/IP and Ethernet. The SEM will be capable of
associating the pre-packetized MPEG data with one or more outgoing
services. IP datagrams will also be received on this interface for insertion into
an output multiplex.

ASI Monitor Port The ASI Monitor Port can be used to monitor any one of the 16 output
transport streams prior to encryption (reference the Output Transport Stream
Configuration window in Section 4, "Setup and Operation" for monitor port
selection).

Test Console Port A front panel nine-pin RS-232 interface used to access internal diagnostics
from the operating system command line shell. It also provides an alternate
method to configure the SEM, as it can be used to assign Internet Protocol
(IP) addresses in the absence of a BOOTP/Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) server.

Alarm Relay The Alarm Relay activates for the following fault conditions:
• Loss of power
• Failed power-up/self-test sequence (failed memory checks, checksum
failure, or failure to properly load code)
• Detection of faulty/failed hardware/firmware by the host processor (unable
to communicate with ACP module, GigE processor/ASI interface controller,
or QAM module, etc.).
• Over temperature condition.

10
2 OVERVIEW

SEM Configurations
The SEM v8 is available in the configurations shown in Table 2-2:
Table 2-2 SEM Configurations
SEM v8 Configurations Applicable Interfaces and Modules

ASI GigE QAM/UC Module* ACP Module*

1. Full Edge, ac(part no. 507199- Yes Yes Yes Yes

001)

2. Modulator/Upconverter, ac Yes Yes Yes No

(part no. 507199-002)

3. Full Edge, dc (part no. 507199- Yes Yes Yes Yes

003)

SEM System Implementations

To deploy a SEM, a controller is required to perform provisioning and configuration of
the SEM device. In a broadcast cable system, where the SEM is required to encrypt
services, the SEM controller would be the DAC 6000. Systems that do not require
encryption or prefer to use Common Tier Encryption (CTE) can rely on the SEM-EM
to function as the controller if necessary.

SEM-EM Re-multiplexing Controller

As a surrogate controller, the SEM-EM is used to configure the SEM for service
routings when encryption functionality is not required. When the SEM-EM is the
SEM controller, the SEM can operate in Manual Routing mode, one of two UDP
Mapping modes, or ASI Demultiplexing mode. Screen sets used to set up the
SEM-EM for these modes are described in Section 4, “Setup and Operation.” In all
of these modes, the input services to the SEM can be either clear content or
pre-encrypted content. When enabled for CTE, the SEM also can encrypt the output
programs.
• In Manual Routing mode, to support re-multiplexing control, the SEM-EM
provides configuration screens that allow the operator to select available input
services from enabled input ports and place them into an output stream with a
user assigned MPEG service number. The re-multiplexing information entered
into the SEM-EM screen-sets is transmitted to the SEM as data using Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP). The SEM internally processes the
re-multiplexing data and then performs the necessary operations to implement
the specified service routings. In addition to routing services, Manual Routing
mode supports the ability to route an entire input stream to one or more output
streams (transport stream pass through).

11
2 OVERVIEW

• When operating in either UDP Mapping mode, the SEM receives services at one
of the GigE interfaces by means of UDP/IP in the form of single program
transport streams (SPTS). Within a given GigE interface, each service is delivered
to the SEM in a UDP segment stream identified by a unique UDP destination
port number. The destination UDP port number of the received UDP segment
stream identifies the output transport stream, physical output (for example,
QAM-1, QAM-2, GigE-2, etc.), and outgoing MPEG service number to be
assigned to the VOD service by the SEM. The SEM then autonomously routes
incoming SPTSs to the appropriate output, and builds the appropriate output PSI
based on the observed destination UDP port value.
• In ASI Demultiplexing mode, to support demultiplexing control, the SEM-EM
provides configuration screens that allow the operator to select available input
services from enabled ASI input ports and de-multiplex them into an output
stream. The demultiplexing information entered into the SEM-EM screen-sets is
transmitted to the SEM as data using Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP). The SEM internally processes the demultiplexing data and then
performs the necessary operations to implement the specified service routings.

SEM-EM Manual Routing Mode for Broadcast Services

The SEM-EM allows an operator to provision a SEM to support broadcast services
when encryption functionality is not required. To support this functionality, the
SEM-EM provides GUI windows that enable the operator to configure individual
service routes. To configure a service route, the SEM-EM window enables the
operator to specify a specific input service, route that service to a specific SEM
output transport stream, and specify the output MPEG service number.
If the SEM is receiving services on the GigE interface, there can be many input
transport streams (either SPTS or MPTS), each using a different destination UDP
port number. The SEM, therefore, must be configured with a list of receive UDP port
numbers to open at the desired GigE input. To enter this data, the operator needs a
list of the UDP ports corresponding to transport streams present at the GigE inputs
to the SEM.

SEM-EM UDP Mapping Mode for VOD Systems

To support UDP Mapping mode, the SEM-EM operator must first specify the
specific SEM GigE input port that is used to receive the input services. The operator
must then specify the base offset, starting program number, and a number of output
services for each individual output transport stream. The combination of base offset,
starting program number, and the total number of output services across all enabled
output transport streams provides the SEM with a list of receive UDP port numbers
to open. The SEM keeps these UDP ports open and then waits for the incoming
connections (input SPTSs).
The base offset specifies the starting (lowest) receive UDP port number; all other
receive UDP port numbers are in a range above the base offset. The base offset
allows the SEM to be easily configured to accept receive UDP port numbers in any
range that the video servers wish to use.

12
2 OVERVIEW

The starting program number is the first output program number that is used for the
output transport stream specified. For example, if the starting program number is 2,
and the number of programs is 20, then the output program numbers are from 2–21.
The total number of output services across all enabled output transport streams
specifies the total number of UDP ports that the SEM must open (one UDP port
number per SEM output service). If the operator specifies 16 services per output
transport stream and there are 8 enabled SEM output transport streams, the SEM
opens 128 UDP ports starting with the base offset number.
Additionally, the operator can specify if the input content to the SEM is clear or
pre-encrypted. (This is accomplished by checking the Input Program Pre-Encrypted
check box on the SEM VOD Control-UDP Mapping window.) If the input content is a
mix of clear and pre-encrypted, then the Pre-Encrypted check box should be
selected. When the input is pre-encrypted, the SEM determines if the individual
services contain pre-encrypted content by examining the input PMT descriptors. The
pre-encrypted output programs routed by the SEM contain the proper CA ECM
descriptors along with additional program information messages.

SEM-EM Eight Channel UDP Mapping Mode for VOD Systems

To support Eight Channel UDP Mapping mode (eight QAM outputs only), the
SEM-EM operator must first specify the specific SEM GigE input port that is used to
receive the input services. The operator must then specify the number of output
services and a starting output program number for each individual QAM output
transport stream. The combination of starting program number and the total number
of output services across all enabled output transport streams provides the SEM
with a list of receive UDP port numbers to open. The SEM keeps these UDP ports
open and then waits for the incoming connections (input SPTSs).
The starting program number is the first output program number that is used for the
output transport stream specified. For example, if the starting program number is 2,
and the number of programs is 20, then the output program numbers are from 2–21.
The total number of output services across all enabled output transport streams
specify the total number of UDP ports that the SEM must open (one UDP port
number per SEM output service). If the operator specifies 16 services per output
transport stream and there are eight enabled SEM output transport streams, the
SEM opens 128 UDP ports.
Additionally, the operator can specify if the input content to the SEM is clear or
pre-encrypted. (This is accomplished by checking the Input Program Pre-Encrypted
check box on the SEM VOD Control-UDP Mapping window.) If the input content is a
mix of clear and pre-encrypted, the Pre-Encrypted check box should be selected.
When the input is pre-encrypted, the SEM determines if the individual services
contain pre-encrypted content by examining the input PMT descriptors. The
pre-encrypted output programs routed by the SEM contain the proper CA ECM
descriptors along with additional program information messages.

13
2 OVERVIEW

SEM-EM Standardized UDP Mapping Mode for VOD Systems

To support Standardized UDP Mapping mode, the SEM-EM operator must first
specify the specific SEM GigE input port that is used to receive input services. The
operator must then specify the transport stream relative 0/1 setting, the number of
output services, and a starting output program number for each individual QAM
output transport stream. The combination of transport stream number, starting
program number, and the total number of output services across all enabled output
transport streams provides the SEM with a list of receive UDP port numbers to
open. The SEM keeps these UDP ports open and then waits for the incoming
connections (input SPTSs).
The transport stream relative 0/1 setting is used as part of the UDP port calculation.
The transport stream numbers can range from 0-15 or from 1-16, depending on the
relative 0/1 setting.
The starting program number is the first output program number that is used for the
output transport stream specified. For example, if the starting program number is 2,
and the number of programs is 20, then the output program numbers are 2-21.
The total number of output services across all enabled output transport streams
specifies the total number of UDP ports that the SEM must open (one UDP port
number per SEM output service). If the operator specifies 16 services per output
transport stream and there are 8 enabled SEM output transport streams, the SEM
opens 128 UDP ports.
Additionally, the operator can specify if the input content to the SEM is clear or
pre-encrypted. (This is accomplished by checking the Input Program Pre-Encrypted
check box on the SEM VOD Control-UDP Mapping window.) If the input content is a
mix of clear and pre-encrypted, the Pre-Encrypted check box should be selected.
When the input is pre-encrypted, the SEM determines if the individual services
contain pre-encrypted content by examining the input PMT descriptors. The
pre-encrypted output programs routed by the SEM contain the proper CA ECM
descriptors along with additional program information messages.

SEM-EM ASI Demultiplexing Mode for Broadcast Systems

When the SEM receives a high-speed ASI transport stream, each individual input
service can be manually routed to a SEM output transport stream (SEM in Manual
Routing mode), or the automatic ASI demultiplexing feature can be used (SEM in ASI
Demultiplexing mode). The purpose of the ASI demultiplexing feature is to reduce
the amount of SEM configuration and provisioning necessary to support the
reception and re-multiplexing of a high-speed transport stream containing a large
number of services. The advantage of this mode is to allow the SEM operator to
specify a range of MPEG service numbers rather than specifying each individual
service route.
When automatic ASI Demultiplexing mode is selected, the SEM-EM operator
essentially identifies groups of services in the input high-speed transport stream
(each group specified by a sequential range of MPEG service numbers) that should
be routed to the same SEM output transport stream. As illustrated in the table that
follows, the range of input MPEG service numbers in the input transport stream
14
2 OVERVIEW

from 1-10 can be routed to QAM1A (output transport stream 1), while MPEG service
numbers 11-20 can be routed to QAM1B (output transport stream 2). The SEM
internally generates the necessary Load SEM subcommands to configure each
individual service route.
OutPut TS ASI Input Starting Ending Destination Destination
Port Program Program IP UDP Port
Number Number

1: GigE 1 1 10 10.100.100.1 1001

2: GigE 1 11 20 10.100.100.1 1000

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

8:

9: QAM1A 2 1 10 N/A N/A

10: QAM1B 2 11 20 N/A N/A

11: QAM2A 2 21 40 N/A N/A

12: QAM2B 2 41 50 N/A N/A

13:

14:

15:

16:

When internally configuring the service routes, the SEM uses the input MPEG
Service Number as the output MPEG service number. Additionally, when configured
for ASI Demultiplexing mode, the SEM-EM allows the operator to specify if all of the
input services should be handled as pre-encrypted services or not. If the operator
specifies that all input services should be handled as pre-encrypted, the SEM
automatically generates the Load SEM Include Service subcommand for each input
service with the applicable input service encryption flag set. This enables all input
services to be either pre-encrypted or clear.
Figure 2-2 illustrates an example system in which multiple SEM devices under the
control of the SEM-EM (using either UDP Mapping mode or Manual Routing mode)
receive content from VOD servers:

15
2 OVERVIEW

Figure 2-2 Typical example of SEM-EM Control (UDP Mapping or Manual Routing)

SEM
SEM
SEM
SEM
SEM
SEM

RF Combiner
DWDM DWDM GbE

GbE Switch
DWDM
DWDM to GbE SEM
Network
SEM
SEM
SEM

GbE SEM
GbE to DWDM
SEM STB

Cable plant node A

SEM STB
SEM STB

Cable plant hub

STB
SEM-EM

Local control network

STB

HFC
3rd Party return Network
To system
SEMs STB

Cable plant node B

STB
STB

STB
STB

Disks
WAN
GbE Switch

Disks
3rd Party server network

Disks 3rd Party

cable system
controller
VOD Server
system

VOD Server
system

Headend

Common Tier Encryption (CTE)

When the SEM is in any of the internal control modes, the SEM can be enabled to
perform Common Tier Encryption. In this mode, the SEM performs all of the normal
service mapping operations; however the output programs can be encrypted in
either Full or Fixed Program Key encryption modes. This allows a SEM to be used in
a VOD environment and encrypt the output programs without the need for an
external controller, such as the DAC 6000. All programs in this mode are encrypted
using the same program tier.
In order for the SEM to encrypt programs in Full encryption mode, the SEM requires
a connection to an external EMM Server (EMMS). Typically, the DAC 6000 operates
as an EMMS. This is necessary since the SEM needs EMMs to fully encrypt all
programs. The SEM can encrypt programs using Fixed Program Key (FPK) encryption

16
2 OVERVIEW

without the need for an EMMS. This allows a SEM to encrypt programs in FPK mode
without the need for any other external devices.
Output Program Encryption Process
When CTE is enabled, the SEM can be configured to encrypt all output programs
mapped from GigE inputs. Programs mapped from the Host Ethernet inputs
(OAM&P or Data IP) cannot be encrypted.
The number of programs that can be encrypted for each output is limited based on
the amount of ACP resources assigned to each output stream. This is set by the
number of encrypted programs per output configuration parameter (Output Transport
Stream configuration screen).In addition, the SEM limits the number of programs
that can be mapped to the total number of programs that can be encrypted. When
the SEM is enabled for CTE, the maximum number of programs that can be mapped
from GigE inputs is 128.
Encrypting output programs via CTE is only allowed under the following conditions:
• SEM is configured in an internal operating mode (such as UDP Port mapping,
Manual Routing).
• SEM contains an ACP Module.
• SEM CTE parameter is set to enabled.
• SEM Encryption mode parameter is set to Full or Fix Program Key (FPK).
CTE Encryption Modes
The SEM supports encrypting programs in Full encryption mode or FPK mode. The
user selects the encryption mode when CTE is enabled. The SEM can always
encrypt output programs in FPK mode, but requires Entitlement Management
Messages (EMMs) from an EMMS in order to fully encrypt programs. The SEM can
also be placed in Clear mode when CTE is enabled (programs are not encrypted).

17
2 OVERVIEW

DAC 6000 Controlling SEMs in a Broadcast System

In a DAC 6000 broadcast system, the SEM receives either SPTS or MPTS inputs,
re-multiplexes services, encrypts services, and provides MPTS outputs that contain
the encrypted services in ASI, GigE, or QAM RF formats. In the example system
shown in Figure 2-3, all of the SEMs are located at the headend and the QAM RF
outputs of each SEM are distributed to each hub in the system. As determined by
system size and the specific system topology, the SEMs can be implemented as
edge devices in the hub locations. In the illustrated implementation, the SEMs are
receiving eight ASI MPTSs from the satellite Integrated Receiver Decoders (IRDs),
which provide decryptor functions, and input transport streams containing
clear/unencrypted services to the GigE from a DWDM distribution network.
In a broadcast system the DAC 6000 functions as the SEM controller. To provision
the SEMs, the operator must route input services to output transport streams in the
DAC 6000 for each SEM. The DAC 6000 configures each SEM by generating Load
SEM subcommand sequences.
Figure 2-3 Typical example of DAC 6000 controlling SEMs in a broadcast system

L-Band Feeds
(each IRD receives a MPTS)
Satellite Hub A
distribution
ASI Feeds
STB
IRD

Cable plant node A

STB
IRD
4 RF
STB
IRD (8 TS’s)
Cable plant hub A
OM 1000
STB
IRD
RF Combiner

SEM STB
OAM&P Network

IRD RPD 2000

IRD HFC
To OAM&P Network
RADD 6000
network
IRD
STB

Cable plant node B

IRD 4 RF STB
(8 TS’s)
GbE STB
DWDM DWDM
DWDM to GbE GbE SEM STB
Network
STB
To OAM&P
network

HFC
Cable plant To nodes
Network
WAN hub B
Ethernet switch (OAM&P)

HDM/SEM-EM
10BaseT
(OAM&P network card) DAC 6000
To SEM #1 10BaseT
10BaseT (KLS 1000
To SEM #2 10BaseT network card)
Ethernet switch (BSI)

(BSI network
card) KLS 1000
redundant
configuration

Digiport terminal
Billing
concentrator
system
(Serial to Ethernet) BSI Wirelink data
(serial RS-232)

Headend

18
2 OVERVIEW

Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) SimulCrypt Operation

When operating within a SimulCrypt system, the SEM provides the functionality of
the Control Word Generator (CWG), SimulCrypt Synchronizer (SCS), Multiplexer
(MUX), Scrambler (SCR), and Motorola ECM Generator (ECMG). The SEM is also
capable of receiving ECMs from third party ECMGs for insertion into an output
multiplex.
Note: PID re-mapping must be enabled when the SEM is operating in SimulCrypt
mode.

Daisy Chaining SEMs

Motorola recommends that each SEM device always be connected to its
own dedicated port on the GigE switch. The loop-through configuration allows
multiple SEM devices to share a common switch port, but requires extra processing
in the SEM, which can reduce performance. Up to six SEMs can be configured to be
daisy-chained in a single loop. SEM daisy chaining supports transmission of ARP
replies, ICMP echo replies, IGMP join messages, and other upstream traffic. When
SEMs are configured in loop through-configuration, Motorola requires the network to
be bi-directional, so that the last SEM in the daisy chain has a physical connection
back to the GigE switch. The use of loop-through mode with uni-directional
networks is not supported. Figure 2-4 illustrates two SEM daisy chains off of an L2
switch.

19
2 OVERVIEW

Figure 2-4 Two SEM daisy chains

RX SEM 1
TX SEM 2 ARP Req
L2 Switch G
i
g
RX TX E
1

SEM 2 ARP Req SEM 2

ARP Req
Bi-directional Network SEM 2
Connection RX
G
i
g
TX E
1

SEM 2
ARP
Reply
SEM 3
RX
G
i (SEM 3 passes ARP Reply
g from SEM 2)
TX E
1

SEM 2 ARP Reply

SEM 4
TX SEM 2 ARP Req RX
G
i
g
TX E
RX
1

SEM 2
ARP Req
SEM 5
RX
G
i
g
TX E
1

SEM 2
ARP Req
SEM 6
RX
G
i (SEM 2 ARP Request
g terminates here)
TX E
1

In the upper daisy chain, ARP requests from the L2 switch are forwarded through
the chain from SEM 1 GigE-1 down the chain, through SEM 2, to the SEM 3 GigE-1
input, which is configured as a loop through (LT) terminator. The other GigE-1 ports
of SEM 1 and SEM 2 are enabled as loop through interfaces. A SEM’s GigE-1 and/or
GigE-2 port is enabled from a drop-down list as a loop through or LT terminator on
the SEM Input/Output Configuration–Gigabit Ethernet window, which is displayed
from the SEM-EM. A SEM’s GigE-3 port cannot be used in daisy chains, as only
GigE-1 and GigE-2 ports are valid.
As shown in Figure 2-5, each SEM in the chain passes data destined only for it to its
network stack. It filters out that data, injects new data from the network stack, and
passes all other remaining information to the next SEM in the chain.

20
2 OVERVIEW

Figure 2-5 SEM with loop through interface

From Switch or previous SEM in chain Pass data destined

G Copy for SEM. To Network Stack
RX i Frames
g
E
1
TX
G
i
g Pass all frames except unicast
E From Network Stack
2
for this interface and pass frames
injected by this SEM.
G
i
g
E
3

To next SEM
in chain (GigE-3 not used for chaining SEMs) Loop Through

As shown in Figure 2-6, the LT terminator performs all of the functions of a pass
through interface; however, it also passes ARP replies, Echo replies, IGMP join
messages, etc., from the entire chain back onto the network. It terminates any traffic
that was not injected from the SEMs in the daisy chain group. To filter information
packets accordingly, the SEM with the LT terminator port knows the MAC addresses
of the other SEMs in the daisy chain group. This information is determined
autonomously and therefore does not have to be configured from the SEM-EM.
Figure 2-6 SEM with LT terminator interface

From previous
SEMs in chain Pass data destined
G Copy for this SEM. To Network Stack
RX i Frames
g
To switch E
1
TX
G
i
g Pass all frames except unicast
E From Network Stack
2
for this interface and pass frames
injected by previous SEMs in
chain and this SEM.
G
i Terminate all traffic that can
g create loops, which will cause
E switch port shutdown.
3

(GigE-3 not used for chaining SEMs) LT Terminator

21
2 OVERVIEW

Daisy Chain Ethernet Frame Processing Summary

Table 2-3 summarizes Ethernet frame processing in a daisy chain:
Table 2-3 Ethernet frame processing summary
Ethernet Frame Type SEM GigE 1-2 Configuration

Loop Through LT Terminator

Single cast Ethernet frames not Do not use. Pass Block all upstream Ethernet traffic
addressed to SEM on to chain. with the exception of those
frames whose source MAC
addresses are one of those
comprising the daisy chain group.

Single cast Ethernet frames addressed Use. Do not pass

to SEM on to chain.

Broadcast Ethernet frames Process frame to

assess if it is of
interest to SEM.
Always pass to
chain for use by
other SEMs.

Multicast Ethernet frames Use if multicast

MAC address of
frame is consistent
with a multicast
group joined by the
SEM. Always pass
on to chain for
possible use by
other SEMs on the
chain.

GigE Data Rate Limitations

When in loop through or loop through terminator mode, the SEM can also be in GigE
Redundant mode. This allows a SEM to actually receive and transmit more than
1Gbps of data. Since the SEM is copying all data that is forwarded, it needs to
temporarily buffer this data. In order to prevent the SEM from overflowing its internal
GigE Ethernet buffers, it is recommended that the total GigE MPEG input data rate
not exceed 1.24Gbps (assuming 7 MPEG packets per UDP packet). In a loop through
with redundancy configuration, this would be equivalent to a cluster of 4 SEMs with
each receiving eight 38.81 Mbps (310Mbps) streams. Each SEM would be receiving
620Mbps on each GigE interface, for a total of 1.24Gbps.

Physical Overview
The SEM mounts in a standard 19 inch equipment rack. It occupies one rack unit
(1.75 vertical inches) and does NOT require a one rack unit blank panel cooling space
above and below it. Cooling air is drawn in the front panel of the SEM and exits the
rear fans.

22
2 OVERVIEW

Figure 2-7 illustrates the SEM and its physical dimensions:

Figure 2-7 SEM dimensions

Fan stud

18.2” (47 cm)

17.3” (44 cm) 17.0” (44 cm)

16.0” (41 cm)

19.0” (49 cm)

1.75” (45mm)
Mounting ear
Dimensions*
• Overall depth from front panel to end of fan 18.2 inches (47 cm)
studs
• Depth from mounting ears to end of fan 17.3 inches (44 cm)
studs (meets European Telecommunications
Standards Institute [ETSI] standards)
• Depth from mounting ears to rear panel 16 inches (41 cm)
• Width 17 inches (44 cm)
• Height 1.75 inches (45 mm)
Approximate Weight 12 pounds (5.44 Kgs)
Mounting Rack mount
*Minimum required rack depth is 18.5 inches (47 cm). Depth from mounting ears to end of fan
studs is 17.3 inches (44 cm), which provides 1.2 inches (3 cm) air-flow space. Cable radius space
is 2.5 inches (6 cm), as the cables connect to the rear panel, which is 16 inches (41 cm) from the
mounting ears.

Refer to Appendix A, "Specifications" for complete physical, electrical, and

environmental specifications.

Front Panel Indicators and Connectors

Figure 2-8 illustrates the SEM front panel indicators and connectors:

23
2 OVERVIEW

Figure 2-8 Front panel indicators and connectors

ASI GigE Enet

ASI
RS-232 Test Port Status 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 1 2
SEM v8 ASI Monitor
5 4 3 2 1
SmartStream Encryptor Modulator
MONITOR Port
9 8 7 6

1 2 3 4 5 6
Table 2-4 summarizes the function of each front panel connector and indicator:

Table 2-4 SEM front panel connectors and indicators

Key Connector/Indicator Description

1 RS-232 Test Port Nine-pin RS-232 Test Port (behind front bezel) — an interface
5 4 3 2 1
used to access internal diagnostics from the operating system
9 8 7 6 command line shell. It also provides an alternate method to
configure the SEM.
Top row connector pins are: 5, 4, 3, 2, 1
Bottom row connector pins are: 9, 8, 7, 6

2 Status/Summary Alarm indicator illuminates during the

Status
power-on or reboot cycle for the following conditions:
• Blinking Red — powered on and performing initial boot
code memory tests.
• Blinking Yellow — boot code memory tests have passed.
Performing low level initialization. This includes initialization
of processor, requesting BOOTP or DHCP, and
downloading of SEM application files.
• Blinking Green — SEM has loaded application code and is
performing final hardware initialization. This also includes
start up of all software tasks.
After the SEM has completed booting, the Status/Summary
Alarm indicator illuminates for the following conditions:
• Solid Green — power on and no faults.
• Solid Yellow — indicates a minor or warning alarm has
occurred.
• Solid Red — indicates a critical or major alarm has
occurred.
3 ASI ASI indicators 1 through 8 — each illuminates to indicate ASI
input validity or ASI output active, as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

• Solid Green — indicates MPEG sync if ASI is used for input.

• Solid Yellow — indicates used for output if ASI is configured
as an output.
• Solid Red — indicates port is enabled for input and input is
not active (no ASI signal detected).
4 GigE • GigE indicators 1, 2, 3 — each illuminates to indicate
1 2 3 Ethernet link, data, and optics status as follows:
• Off — no link or link down (the auto-negotiation failed, no
communication to partner, or no link pulse observed).
• Solid Green — link up (auto-negotiation link pulse activity,
partners agree on capabilities, but no data traffic).
• Blinking Green — link up and traffic (both transmit and
receive).
• Solid Red — faulty or failed optical interface. Can also
24
2 OVERVIEW

Key Connector/Indicator Description

indicate that a GigE port is enabled, but no SFP modules

installed.
5 Enet 10/100Base-T Ethernet indicators 1 and 2 — each illuminates
1 2 to indicate Ethernet link, data, and collision status as follows:
• Off — no link or link down (the auto-negotiation failed, no
communication to partner, or no link pulse observed).
• Solid Green — link up (auto-negotiation link pulse activity,
partners agree on capabilities, but no data traffic).
• Blinking Green — link up and traffic (both transmit and
receive).
• Alternating Green/Yellow —- collision detected (if in
half-duplex mode, 10/100Base-T only). Light LED for
100 msec after detection of collision. During high collisions
appears as alternating green-yellow.
6 ASI Monitor Port — can be used to monitor a selected output
ASI
Monitor
stream prior to encryption (reference the Output Transport
Stream Configuration window in Section 4, "Setup and
Port

Operation" for monitor port selection).

25
2 OVERVIEW

Input/Output and Power Connectors

Figure 2-9 illustrates the SEM rear panel input/output and power connectors. Also
illustrated are the alarm contact connector and fans.
Figure 2-9 SEM rear panel
-40 - -60 GND
6A MAX
230W MAX

9 10 3 10 5 10 11
8

FAN 2 Enet1
FAN 1

FAN 3
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT GND
Complies with 21 CFR
100 - 240V ~
1040.10 and 1040.11 50 - 60Hz
ALARM NC C NO RF #1 RF #2 RF #3 RF #4
Gigabit Ethernet
10/100
base-T 2.6 - 1.1A
Ethernet 230W MAX
In I/O GigE1 GigE2 GigE3 Enet2
ASI-1 ASI-2 ASI-3 ASI-4 ASI-5 ASI-6 ASI-7 ASI-8

1 2 4 6 7
Table 2-5 summarizes the function of each rear panel connector:
Table 2-5 SEM rear panel connectors
Key Connector Description

1 Asynchronous Serial Interfaces one through four (ASI-1

through ASI-4) are dedicated inputs. These are 75 Ohm
In
BNC connectors.
ASI-1 ASI-2 ASI-3 ASI-4

2 Four (ASI-5 through ASI-8) of the eight ASIs can be

configured as inputs or outputs under software control.
I/O
These are 75 Ohm BNC connectors.
ASI-5 ASI-6 ASI-7 ASI-8

3 The optional QAM/UC module outputs eight QAM RF

carriers. Each of the four RF connectors output a pair of
RF #1 RF #2 RF #3 RF #4 RF QAM carriers on adjacent channels. These are F-type
connectors.

4 The GigE SFP transceivers can transmit and receive

MPEG transport streams. (Reference Appendix B,
GigE1 GigE2 GigE3 "Cabling Specifications and Approved SFP Transceiver
Vendors" for approved SFP vendors.)

5 Enet1 ENET1 is a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface (OAM&P)

that receives remultiplexing, message extraction,
message insertion, and encryption commands from an
external controller. This is a standard RJ-45 connector.

6 ENET2 is a 10/100Base-T Ethernet interface (Data IP)

that can be used to receive pre-packetized MPEG data.

Enet2

7 The AC power input connector accepts inputs from 100

through 240 Vac (50 through 60 Hz).
GND
100 - 240V ~
50 - 60Hz

2.6 - 1.1A
230W MAX

26
2 OVERVIEW

Key Connector Description

8 -40 - -60 GND

The DC power input connector accepts inputs from –40
through –60 Vdc.
6A MAX
230W MAX

9 The Alarm Contact connector activates for the following

fault conditions:
ALARM NC C NO
• Loss of power
• Failed power-up/self-test sequence (failed memory
checks, checksum failure, or failure to properly load
code).
• Detection of faulty/failed hardware/firmware by the
host processor (unable to communicate with ACP
module, GigE processor/ASI interface controller, or
QAM/UC module, etc.).
• Over temperature condition.
The Alarm Contact connector provides a Form-C relay
contact closure whose ratings are not to exceed 30V (AC
or DC), 0.5A (AC or DC), and 3W maximum. Example
valid contact loads are: 30V @ 100mA, 6V @ 500mA,
12V @ 250mA, etc.
Voltage multiplied by current (V x I) must never exceed
3W.

10 Three field replaceable fans extend from the rear of the

SEM. To replace a fan, reference Appendix D, “Fan
Field Replacement Procedure.”

11 Ground stud.

27
3 INSTALLATION
Step-by-step instructions to install the SEM are covered under:
• Mounting the SEM
• Installing the GigE SFP transceivers
• Connecting the interface cables
• Applying power to the unit
• Confirming SEM Power-on Sequencing

Before You Begin

Before you begin the installation, take a few minutes to review the installation
information, gather special tools, and complete the tasks listed below to make the
installation as quick and easy as possible:
1. Verify that you received the following items with the SEM shipment:
Item Quantity Description

SEM unit 1 The SEM device configured

with hardware as ordered.

Mounting screws, 10-32, 0.5 4 Provided to mount the unit in

inches long, Phillips, round the rack.

As applicable, 1 Power cord for unit.

• AC cord, 3 conductor, 7 feet
6 inches, 18AWG, or
• DC cord, 3 conductor,
15 feet, 14 AWG
2. As determined by the SEM system implementation and installed options, the
following items, which are not included with the SEM, are required to complete
the installation (reference Appendix B, "Cabling Specifications and Approved SFP
Transceiver Vendors" for cable characteristics):
Item Description (rear panel connections)

One Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connector For connection to OAM&P system interface
ENET1.

One Ethernet cable with RJ-45 connector and In-band data service connection to ENET2 (not
ferrite bead (Stewart part number implemented in initial SEM release).
28A2025-0A0)

Four RF coaxial cables with F-type connectors For connection to the optional QAM/UC module
dual channel upconverters RF #1 through RF #4.

Eight ASI cables with BNC-type connectors For connection to ASI interfaces ASI-1 through
ASI-8.

29
3 INSTALLATION

Item Description (rear panel connections)

Three vendor approved SFP transceivers (as For the three rear panel GigE ports.
listed in Appendix B, "Cabling Specifications
and Approved SFP Transceiver Vendors") with
applicable cables.

3. Obtain or fabricate any necessary cables. Check the cabling guidelines provided
in Appendix B, "Cabling Specifications," for the length restrictions, connector, and
cable or wire type for each connection required for your system.

Mounting the SEM

Mount the SEM in a standard 19 inch rack. It is NOT necessary to provide an open
space above and below the unit for air-flow. If the equipment operates continuously
in a closed cabinet, use forced-air circulation to ensure maximum equipment life and
optimum performance.
Caution: Improper grounding may damage the SEM. Refer to the national guidelines
or local standards for the SEM proper grounding to equipment racks and to the
building grounding system.
The rack is to be secured to the building structure before SEM operation.
To mount the unit in the rack:
1. Insert the four screws with the washers through the four mounting holes in the
front panel and into the mounting holes in the rack, as illustrated in Figure 3-1:
Figure 3-1 Rack mounting

Front

2. Tighten all screws.

30
3 INSTALLATION

Installing/Removing GigE SFP Transceivers

For a list of approved SFP transceivers, refer to Appendix B — Cabling Specifications
and Approved SFP Transceiver Vendors.
To install an SFP transceiver:
1. Remove the dust plug from the SEM rear panel GigE port. (Save the dust plug
should it become necessary to recap the port when not in use.)
2. As shown in Figure 3-2, ensure the SFP transceiver door is closed and that the
hinge faces down, toward the bottom of the SEM.
Refer to vendor documentation for specific SFP transceiver installation
instructions.
3. Gently push SFP transceiver into GigE port.
To remove an SFP transceiver:
1. Open hinge door of SFP transceiver.
2. Gently pull SFP transceiver from the GigE port.
Refer to vendor documentation for specific SFP transceiver removal instructions.
3. Install a dust plug in the GigE port if it will not be used.
Figure 3-2 Typical SFP transceiver installation/removal
Installation SEM rear panel

Door is closed

PUSH

Hinge on bottom

Removal SEM rear panel Step 1

Rotate door
90º to open

Hinge on bottom

SEM rear panel Step 2

Door is open

PULL

Hinge on bottom

31
3 INSTALLATION

Refer to vendor documentation for proper handling, cleaning, and maintenance of

SFP transceivers:
http://www.infineon.com/fiberoptic
http://www.ocp-inc.com
http://www.methode.com
http://www.agilent.com
http://www.finisar.com

Connecting the Interface Cables

The Ethernet interface cable from ENET1 to the headend LAN is the only standard
cabling. All other interface cabling is contingent upon the SEM configuration as
defined by the system implementation. Figure 3-3 shows the location of the various
I/O ports.
The insertion/removal of connectors from the SEM can be facilitated with common
“F” and “BNC” tools. Typical tools are the “F” connector removal tool from Toner
(part number XQT) and the “BNC” tool from Techni-Tool (part number 702SC007).
Figure 3-3 SEM rear panel I/O cable connectors
Each of the four ENET1 is a -40 - -60 GND
6A MAX
QAM RF connectors 10/100 BaseT 230W MAX

outputs a pair of Ethernet interface

RF QAM carriers used for headend
on adjacent channels. LAN connection.

FAN 2 Enet1
FAN 1

FAN 3

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT GND

Complies with 21 CFR
100 - 240V ~
1040.10 and 1040.11 50 - 60Hz
ALARM NC C NO RF #1 RF #2 RF #3 RF #4
Gigabit Ethernet
10/100
base-T 2.6 - 1.1A
Ethernet 230W MAX
In I/O GigE1 GigE2 GigE3 Enet2
ASI-1 ASI-2 ASI-3 ASI-4 ASI-5 ASI-6 ASI-7 ASI-8

ASI 1-4 are inputs only. ASI 5-8 can be configured GigE 1-3 can transmit ENET2 is a10/100 BaseT
Each can pass as inputs or outputs. and receive MPEG TS. Ethernet interface
a single MPTS Each can pass a single MPTS Usually, GigE-2&3 are that can receive
up to 213 Mbps. up to 213 Mbps for inputs used to receive TS and pre-packetized
and 206 Mbps for outputs. GigE-1 is used to transport MPEG packets from
encrypted streams the UDP/IP and Ethernet.
to the distribution network.

SEM Power Connection to AC Power

For ac units, use only an ac-power cord that complies with the country’s product
safety requirements.
For ac units, connect the ac-power cord after all I/O connections are complete. The
power supply automatically senses and adapts to any input from 100 through
240 V ac, at 50 through 60 Hz.

32
3 INSTALLATION

Caution: To prevent electrical shock, do not use the polarized power cord with an
extension cord, receptacle, or other outlet unless all blades can be fully inserted to
prevent blade exposure.

SEM Power Connection to DC Power

For dc units, use the provided dc power cord assembly.
For dc units, connect the dc-power cord after all I/O connections are complete. The
power supply automatically senses and adapts to any input from ) –40 through
–60 V dc.
Caution: The SEM with dc power must be installed in a restricted access area.
The input of the power supply is isolated from chassis ground. Either the positive or
the negative input terminal can be grounded, as determined by the application. See
the table below for typical –48 V dc system installation:

Line Cord Wire Color Description Typical Connection for

–48 V dc System

Red Hot (–) Connect to negative terminal of

48 V dc source.

Black Return (+) Connect to positive terminal of

48 V dc source. Positive
terminal of 48 V dc source may
be connected to chassis ground.

Green with yellow stripe Chassis Ground Connect to chassis ground.

Confirming SEM Power-on Sequencing

After applying power, the STATUS LED indicates SEM sequencing as follows:
• Initially, the STATUS LED is flashing red to indicate the SEM is performing a
memory test.
• The STATUS LED illuminates flashing yellow to indicate a successful memory
test completion and boot code execution.
• The STATUS LED then starts flashing green to indicate application code is
configuring the SEM for operation.
• When the STATUS LED is solid green, it indicates the unit is operational.
• All of the ASI and GigE ports blink red, and then green.
If the STATUS LED is yellow or solid red, and the error does not prevent activating
the SEM-EM, reference Section 5, “SEM Verification.”
If the STATUS LED is yellow or solid red and the error precludes activating the
SEM-EM to perform the SEM verification, reference Section 6, “Troubleshooting” for
procedures to help rectify any problems.
33
4 SETUP AND OPERATION
If implemented in a broadcast system, you must configure the SEM in its
associated DAC 6000 database. When implemented in VOD systems that
require encryption, you must configure the SEM in the Device Manager
database.
The SEM Element Manager (SEM-EM) is used to configure the SEM. For
systems that do not require encryption, the SEM-EM can also serve as an
SEM controller.
After the SEM parameters are configured using the SEM-EM, proceed to
Section 5, “SEM Verification.”

Network Connection
At power-up, the operating configuration of the SEM is determined by data
stored internally in flash memory, by data that is downloaded from a bootstrap
protocol (BOOTP) server, or a DHCP server on the system LAN. The particular
method used to set up initial operation depends on the system configuration.
After setting the initial operating configuration, modify the configuration by:
• Sending commands from an SNMP network manager (such as the
SEM-EM).
• Forcing a reboot to download a new configuration to the SEM from the
BOOTP or DHCP server. The SEM only processes BOOTP and DHCP
responses from the OAM&P interface (ENET1).
(MAC addresses for the three GigE ports and two Ethernet ports are included
on the serial number label on the bottom of the SEM.)

Verifying the Network Connection

Ping the SEM OAM&P interface to ensure the IP address was assigned. At
bootup, the OAM&P interface, ENET1, should be connected to the local
network. The SEM will always attempt to auto-negotiate at bootup and will set
the duplex and data rate (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) depending on the results of
the auto-negotiation process. If the Data IP interface ENET2 is to be used, it
should also be connected to its own network at bootup. ENET1 and ENET2
must be on separate networks.

SEM–EM Requirements
The SmartStream Encryptor Modulator–Element Manager (SEM-EM)
standalone application is downloaded from the SEM and runs under JRE 1.2.2
and above (up to 1.5).

35
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Browsers
Recommended web browsers to run the SEM-EM are reasonably current
versions of Netscape Navigator® (latest version is 8.1) or Microsoft® Internet
Explorer (latest version is 6.0). Browser or proxy settings are not required. The
latest versions of these browsers can be downloaded from the following web
sites:
• http://www.netscape.com (click on Browser Central)
• http://www.microsoft.com (click on Resources, and then Downloads)
• To view the Java™-enabled console, you also must download the Sun® Java
Runtime Environment (JRE), version 1.2.2 or higher (up to 1.5.0). The JRE
can be downloaded from the Sun Web site at: http://java.sun.com/getjava

Hardware
The SEM-EM is like most Windows® applications: the faster the processor and
the greater the memory, the faster the SEM-EM will respond. Systems with
more than 512 MB and/or more memory are highly recommended. Also, the
larger the display window and/or the higher the resolution, the better the
SEM-EM display clarity.
Item Minimum Specification Recommended
Specification

PC Processor 300 MHz Pentium® II P4 1.0 GHz

RAM 128 MB 512 MB

Disk free space 50 MB 50 MB

Display resolution 800 x 600 1024 x 768

(minimum)

Operating Systems
The SEM-EM runs under Microsoft Windows NT® version 4.0, Windows® 2000,
or Windows XP™.

36
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Initiating an SEM-EM Session

To start a session using the SEM-EM:
1. Invoke the system browser and enter the SEM IP address in the URL
address field. Typically, the OAM&P network is used to communicate with
the SEM via the SEM-EM. However, the Data IP network may also be used
(after it is properly configured). The addressed SEM home page appears, as
shown in Figure 4-1:
Figure 4-1 Initiating an SEM-EM session

2. As applicable:
• Click the hyperlink to download the JRE 1.2.2 from the Sun website (if
no connection occurs, visit the Sun website and search for JRE
downloads).
• Download the SEM-EM application.
The file download pop-up appears, as shown in Figure 4-2:
Figure 4-2 File download pop-up

3. Click Save this file to Disk and click OK. Note that the name of the SEM-EM
file, semem.jar, can be changed to denote a specific SEM or SEM version
(for example, sem620.jar). However, the file extension must be “.jar.”
37
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

4. To launch the SEM-EM after the application downloads, either double-click

the downloaded semem.jar (recommended) or access MS-DOS and, at the
command line, type:
java –jar semem.jar and press ENTER.
(type java^-jar^semem.jar where ^ means press spacebar)
The SEM Element Manager Login window, shown in Figure 4-3, displays (a
typical IP address is shown):
Figure 4-3 SEM Element Manager Login window

5. Type a <User name> (root is the default).

6. Type a <password> (password is the default).
7. Type the <SEM IP address> or select an SEM from the drop-down list.
(The drop-down list contains the most recently accessed SEMs.)
8. Click OK.
If an incorrect password or user name was entered, an error popup displays, as
shown in Figure 4-4:
Figure 4-4 Incorrect password error popup

38
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

If there is an active SEM Unit Alarm, the Alarms window displays, as shown in
Figure 4-5:
Figure 4-5 Alarms window

If the SEM does not have an active SEM Unit Alarm, the SEM-EM Main
window is displayed as shown in Figure 4-6. The drop-down lists for each of the
menu bar selections are shown in Figure 4-7, Figure 4-8, Figure 4-14,
Figure 4-52, and Figure 4-67.

39
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-6 SEM_EM Main window

SEM-EM Software Toolset

The SEM-EM is the primary interface to the SEM for setup and operation. It is
a remote user interface based on a Java application that enables you to
monitor an SEM remotely and locally. The software toolset has four drop-down
lists that enable access to screen-sets, as follows:
• System — provides screen-sets to reboot the SEM, invoke pop-up
information about the SEM, or exit the SEM-EM application.
• Configuration — provides screen-sets to configure SEM parameters for the
system, for I/O, PSIP, SimulCrypt, QAM and upconverters, and output
transport streams.
• VOD Control — provides screen-sets for UDP mapping, manual
remultiplexing, ASI demultiplexing, or eight-channel UDP mapping.
• Status — provides the capability to view any of the status reports and to
save all of them to a text file.
Windows within a majority of the screen-sets are tab selected. Each window
has operating buttons that appear at the bottom-right:

40
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Button Function State

Close Closes the dialogue. All Always enabled

changes not applied are lost.

Apply Saves (writes) all changes to Always enabled

the SEM. For dynamic fields,
changes take effect
immediately. Changes to
fields that are not dynamic
require the SEM to be
rebooted to take effect.

Refresh Loads (reads) values for all Always enabled

fields from the SEM. All
changes not applied are lost. If
you change a field and do not
apply it, clicking refresh
restores the original value.

Submit Saves (writes) user name and Always enabled

password changes to the
SEM.

41
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

System
When logged in as “root,” clicking System on the SEM-EM menu bar displays
the drop-down list, as illustrated in Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-7 System drop-down list as user “root”

When logged in as a user other than “root,” clicking System on the SEM-EM
menu bar displays the drop-down list, as illustrated in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 System drop-down list as other user

As shown in the following four figures, from the System drop-down list you can
invoke windows to reboot the SEM, manage user names and passwords,
display current SEM revision level information, or exit the SEM-EM.

42
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Reboot
The Reboot SEM popup is illustrated in Figure 4-9.
Figure 4-9 Reboot SEM popup

Click Yes to reboot the SEM.

Administration
The Administration window is only accessible while logged in as “root.” The
default user name is root, and the default password is password. The
Administration window is illustrated in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 Administration window

43
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Current User Names User “root” is always displayed. If an

additional user has been added, this user
name will be displayed as well.

Remove User Deletes the selected user name from the

SEM-EM. User “root” cannot be removed.

Set Password Opens the Set Password window, which

allows the user to change the current
password. The Set Password window is
illustrated in Figure 4-11 below.

Password Expiration Check Enabled If enabled, the SEM-EM will check for
password expiration each time a login occurs
or right after a reboot or reprogram. If
disabled, the password will never expire.

Password Expiration Time 1 – 999 days; default value – 90 days.

The number of days a password remains valid
after it is created.

Setting
Figure 4-11 Set Password window

The Setting menu item is only accessible while logged in as a user other than
“root.” This opens the Set Password Window. It allows the current user’s
password to be changed. Consistent with standard software procedures,
changing requires entering the current user name or password followed by the
new one. A password change requires the new password to be entered twice
before clicking Submit.

44
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

About
The About popup is illustrated in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 About popup

Click OK to acknowledge and remove the popup.

Exit
The Exit popup is illustrated in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 Exit popup

Click Yes to exit or click No to remove the popup.

45
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Configuration
Clicking Configuration on the SEM-EM menu bar displays the drop-down list, as
illustrated in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Configuration drop-down list

The Configuration screen-sets described in the subsections that follow are:

SEM System Configuration
• SEM Device Operating Mode
• System Time
• Ethernet
• Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration
• Command Interface
• EAS
• Traps
• Advanced
• PID Remapping
SEM Input/Output Configuration
• ASI Ports
46
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

• Gigabit Ethernet
• Redundant Gigabit Ethernet
• Redundant Gigabit Ethernet
• GigE Static Table Configuration
• Status – GigE Routing Table Status
• GigE Static ARP Table Configuration
• VLAN/CFM Configuration
• IGMP Configuration
• GigE Input UDP Port Configuration
• Advanced
PSIP Configuration
• PSIP configuration
SimulCrypt Configuration (not shown)
• General
• SCS-ECMG
• EMMG-Mux
• Status
QAM and Up Converter Configuration
• Annex B (DCII)
• Annex A (DVB)
• Annex C
Output Transport Stream Configuration
• OTS Cable Encryptor
• OTS Manual Routing
• OTS UDP Mapping
• ASI Demultiplexing
• Eight Channel UDP Mapping
• Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring

47
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM System Configuration — SEM Device Operating Mode

The SEM Device Operating Mode panel is located at the top of the SEM
System Configuration window. If the operating mode is changed, it must be
saved and the SEM must be rebooted for the change to take effect. There are
two types of SEM operating modes: external and internal.
• External mode, such as Cable Encryptor, is used when the SEM is
externally controlled. In most cases, the external controller is a DAC 6000.
• Internal mode, such as Manual Routing, is used when the SEM is
controlled through an SNMP manager, such as the SEM-EM
The panel is illustrated in Figure 4-15. The operating mode is selected
according to SEM implementation.
Figure 4-15 SEM Device Operating Mode panel

There are up to eight operating modes in the drop-down list:

External modes:
1. Cable Encryptor — broadcast cable system applications and real-time
encryption VOD applications.
2. SimulCrypt — used to emulate SimulCrypt encryption. SimulCrypt requires
an installed ACP module, SimulCrypt to be enabled, and entitlements,
fulfilled for this operating mode to appear in the SEM Device Operating
Mode drop-down list as a selectable item.
Internal modes:
3. Manual Routing — operator input controls the SEM-EM, acting as a
surrogate controller.
4. UDP Mapping — VOD system algorithm controls the SEM-EM, acting as a
surrogate controller.
5. Standardized UDP Mapping — another VOD system algorithm controls the
SEM-EM, acting as a surrogate controller.
6. Eight Channel UDP Mapping — used to emulate SEM-like devices that
have eight QAM outputs.
7. ASI Demultiplexing — ASI inputs to GigE and/or QAM outputs, whereby
starting and ending program service ranges are defined for outputs
associated to specific ASI inputs. It is a quicker alternative than using
Manual Remapping, which entails defining each service output individually.
8. ISA Switched Digital Video - SEM acts as an Edge Device that receives and
processes commands from two external sources using RPC protocol. Only
GigE to QAM mappings are allowed.

48
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM System Configuration — System Time

The System Time window is used to identify the system time source. The
System Time window is illustrated in Figure 4-16 and defined in Table 4-1:
Figure 4-16 System Time window

49
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-1 System Time window field definitions

Item Definition

*SEM System Time This value is the System Time, which is used to start and stop
Load SEM commands. The internal system time is initialized
when the SEM gets its first time update from the designated
source. The internal time is then validated each time there is an
update from the time source. Corrections are made to keep the
internal time consistent with the time source. The second line
shows the system time reported in Global Positioning System
(GPS) seconds.
The time displayed is only relevant when the SEM is configured
to receive GPS time from an external source. When the time
source is set to Internal, the SEM System Time is not used.

System Up Time Indicates the run time of the SEM since the last reboot.

*Time Source The SEM requires a Time Source to execute Load SEM
commands. The Time Source can be configured to come from
Load SEM commands, be extracted from an ASI input stream, or
come from an SNTP time source. Drop-down options are:
• Load SEM –— Time Source is from Load SEM commands
provided by an external controller. Only applicable when the
SEM is externally controlled (through Cable Encryptor or
SimulCrypt operating modes).
• *ASI Input Stream — Time Source derives from an ASI input
port (DCII System Time message).
• ASI Input Port — only applicable and displayed when the Time
Source is set to ASI Input Stream and provides the ASI input
port providing the system time.
• *SNTP — Time Source derives from an SNTP server. If an
SNTP server is not specified, time is received from any SNTP
server.
• SNTP Server — IP address of the SNTP server. Only applicable
and displayed when the Time Source is set to SNTP. System
time will only be received from the specified SNTP server. The
SEM will specifically poll for SNTP time from the specified
server and will only accept SNTP replies from the specified
server. The SEM will poll for SNTP time every 64 seconds.
• UTC Offset — the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) offset in
seconds, which is used when converting UTC time from the
local time server into GPS time used by the SEM. When Time
Source is SNTP, this is the value used to adjust the received
UTC time to GPS time. For all other Time Source settings, this
is the UTC value received from the Time Source (ASI input or
Load SEM).
• Internal — Time Source is internal (no actual GPS time is
maintained). Only applicable when the SEM is configured in an
internal operating mode (UDP Mapping, Manual Routing, or ASI
Demultiplexing).
Use Local PC Time Sets SEM System Time to the Current Local PC Time. This
setting is applicable only if Time Source is set to “Internal.” This
setting is not maintained during a reboot (must be re-applied
upon rebooting the SEM). This setting is useful when no external
time source is available (such as an SNTP server). This allows the
SEM to use a current time reference for logs.

50
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Current Local Time The current time and date of the PC that is running the SEM-EM.
This field is only viewable if Time Source is set to “Internal.”

UTC Offset This value is the Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) offset from
GPS time. Subtract this value from GPS time to convert from
GPS to UTC. When the Time Source is SNTP, this value can be
set to specify the UTC offset that the SEM will use in calculating
GPS time.
When the Time Source is from an input stream or Load SEM
command, this value is not configurable. It is displayed as a
status item to show the UTC value received from the input
stream or Load SEM command.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

SEM System Configuration — Ethernet

The Ethernet window provides the capability to select the boot method and
identify the host default gateway. It provides the capability to view MAC
addresses of ENET1 and ENET2, as well as the capability to define the IP
Addresses and Subnet Masks (if applicable) for both of these Ethernet ports.
ENET1 and ENET2 must be on different networks. The Ethernet window is
illustrated in Figure 4-17 and defined in Table 4-2.

51
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-17 Ethernet window

Table 4-2 Ethernet window field definitions

Item Definition

*Boot Method Provides four selections to set the boot method of the SEM:
1. No DHCP or BOOTP
2. DHCP Only
3. BOOTP Only
4. DHCP and BOOTP
The Boot Method determines how the SEM will perform the bootup
process on the next reboot. When setting the SEM to No DHCP or
BOOTP, this ensures that the SEM will not download a new
configuration file or a new code image. When the SEM is to be
upgraded, the Boot Method must be set to either perform DHCP or
BOOTP.
Note: The SEM only processes BOOTP and DHCP responses from
ENET1. ENET2 cannot be used to BOOTP an SEM.

*Host Default The 32-bit IP address of the router interface acting as a gateway to
Gateway remote or foreign networks. This address is normally provided during the

52
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

BOOTP process, but can be changed once the SEM is booted.

Config Multicast Clicking this button invokes the Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration
window, which is illustrated in Figure 4-18 and defined in Table 4-3.

MAC Address View only MAC addresses of ENET1 and ENET2. These addresses are
also provided on the serial number label on the bottom of the SEM. The
addresses are set at the factory and cannot be changed. The string length
is 17 characters in the format 'hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh', where 'hh' is a
hexadecimal number.

*IP Address The SEM ENET1 and ENET2 32-bit network addresses in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
format. The ENET1 address is for the OAM&P network connection, and
the ENET2 address is for a user-specified network connection. ENET1
and ENET2 must be configured on separate networks.

*Subnet Mask The ENET1 and ENET2 32-bit subnet masks for their respective
networks. When masking is employed, it indicates the network address
and host ID portion of the IP address.

Network Speed Ethernet speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps). This is determined by the results
of the auto negotiation process. Default is 100 Mbps.

Duplex Mode Ethernet duplex mode (full or half). This is determined by the results of
the auto negotiation process. Default is Full.

Auto Negotiation This setting is predefined by the SEM. It is not user configurable. The
SEM Host Ethernet interfaces always perform auto-negotiation upon
booting.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

53
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM System Configuration — Ethernet — Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration

The Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration window provides input identification
for up to 16 input transport streams for ENET1 and for ENET2. A typical
OAM&P ENET1 example would be the IP address of a RADD 6000 and the
UDP Port identifier for downloading information inband to the set-top
population through the SEM instead of the OM 1000. The DAC 6000, however,
would actually implement the download.
The configuration of multicast groups is dynamic, and does not require a
reboot. However, the SEM joins a multicast group using the information in this
window whenever a UDP port is opened. Therefore, if the UDP port is already
opened, changing the multicast information for that specific UDP port is not
applied until the UDP is closed and then re-opened.
A UDP port is opened only when a service, PID, or transport stream is mapped
from a UDP port to an output stream. When all mappings are removed, the
UDP port is closed. Therefore, to change the multicast group on a UDP port
requires that all mappings on the UDP port be deleted and then re-added.
The Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration window is illustrated in Figure 4-18
and defined in Table 4-3.
Figure 4-18 Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration window

54
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-3 Fast Ethernet Multicast Configuration window field definitions

Item Definition

*OAM&P Multicast IP The ENET1 Multicast IP address (i.e., the Multicast IP group
the SEM will join). The IP address must be a valid,
non-reserved multicast address or set to 0.0.0.0 to indicate
not in use.
Reserved: 224.0.0.0 — 224.0.0.255
Valid Range: 224.0.1.0 — 239.255.255.255
Not In Use: 0.0.0.0.

*OAM&P UDP Port The ENET1 UDP Port number associated with the Multicast IP
address indicates that when the SEM is requested to open
this UDP port, the SEM will automatically join the multicast
group as defined by the associated multicast IP address.
When a UDP port is assigned a Multicast IP address, the SEM
will also receive singlecast and network broadcast packets on
that UDP port.
UDP Ports must be set to a valid UDP Port range outside of
the IANA reserved range or set to 0 to indicate not in use:
Reserved: 1 — 1023
Valid Range: 1024 — 65535
Not In Use: 0

*Data IP Multicast IP The ENET2 Multicast IP address (i.e., the Multicast IP group
the SEM will join). The IP address must be a valid, non-
reserved multicast address or set to 0.0.0.0 to indicate not in
use.
Reserved: 224.0.0.0 — 224.0.0.255
Valid Range: 224.0.1.0 — 239.255.255.255
The address 0.0.0.0 is used to indicate not in use.

*Data IP UDP Port The ENET2 UDP Port number associated with the Multicast IP
address indicates that when the SEM is requested to open
this UDP port, the SEM will automatically join the multicast
group as defined by the associated multicast IP address.
When a UDP port is assigned a Multicast IP address, the SEM
will also receive singlecast and network broadcast packets on
that UDP port.
UDP Ports must be set to a valid UDP Port range outside of
the IANA reserved range or set to 0 to indicate not in use:
Reserved: 1 — 1023
Valid Range: 1024 — 65535
Not In Use: 0
The same Multicast IP address and UDP port cannot be
assigned to both the OAM&P network and Data IP network.

Delete Expedites clearing fields: check the boxes of those fields to be

cleared to zeros, and click Apply.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

55
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM System Configuration — Command Interface

The Command Interface tab appears only when Cable Encryptor or
Simulcrypt 1 is selected from the SEM Device Operating Mode drop-down list.
The Command Interface window is used to define the command port-to-port
connection between the controller and the SEM. The SEM can only be
externally controlled through the OAM&P interface (Enet-1). Enet-2 cannot be
used to control an SEM. The Command Interface window is illustrated in Figure
4-19 and defined in Table 4-4.
Figure 4-19 Command Interface window

56
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-4 Command Interface window field definitions

Item Definition

Multi-controller Enabled This box enables multi-controller support.

Multi-controller support allows the SEM to
respond to any controller that initiates
communications with it on the appropriate
UDP port.

Multi-controller Log This button opens the Multi-controller Log

window.

Controller IP The IP address of the local controller sending

Load SEM commands, which is usually a
DAC 6000, but may also be some other device.
This address is required by the SEM to begin
operations when the SEM is externally
controlled. The default value is 0.0.0.0, which
is an invalid IP address.
The SEM will not begin normal operation if this
value is not configured to a valid Class A, B, or
C IP address.
This parameter is only used if the Multi-
controller is not enabled.
This parameter takes immediate effect (no
reboot required).

Controller Port The port number of the local controller. The

SEM uses this port when establishing UDP
communications with the controller to receive
Load SEM commands. The Controller UDP
Port must be set to a valid UDP Port range
outside of the IANA reserved range.
Reserved: 0 — 1023
Valid Range: 1024 — 65535
This parameter is only used if Multi-controller
is not enabled.
This parameter takes immediate effect (no
reboot required).

*SEM Port The UDP port number of the SEM. The SEM
accepts UDP messages at this port that are
from the local controller. These messages
include Load SEM messages and
acknowledgements of report backs that the
SEM has sent. This UDP port can only be
used for the reception of Load SEM
messages. Load SEM messages can only be
received on the OAM&P interface (Enet-1).
The SEM must be rebooted for this change to
take effect.

57
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

*Command Retry Period Specifies the number of seconds the SEM will
retry Load SEM commands before invalidating
them and sending a reportback. The default
value is 30 seconds. Not all errors result in a
retry, as some errors result in immediate
reportback and deletion.
It is highly recommended that this value not
be changed without first consulting Motorola.
The SEM must be rebooted for this change to
take effect.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

Multi-controller Log
The Multi-controller Log window displays the controller IP address, controller
UDP port, and GPS time of the last 48 external controllers that the SEM
received commands from since boot up. The most recent controller is listed at
index 1. The Multi-controller Log window is illustrated in Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-20 Multi-controller Log

58
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM System Configuration — EAS

The EAS tab is available in any SEM Device Operating Mode. The EAS window
controls configuration of SCTE-18 Emergency Alert System message reception
and insertion. Reception/insertion of SCTE-18 EAS messages can be enabled
or disabled for each output stream. The user can configure the Host Ethernet
interface, GigE interface, Host Ethernet Multicast IP address, and UDP port on
which to receive EAS messages. GigE EAS multicast configuration is done via
the GigE UDP Configuration screen. All configuration settings for EAS are
dynamic (that is, they take immediate affect; no reboot is required.)
A count of the number of EAS messages received is also provided. EAS
messages received are re-inserted onto each EAS-enabled output stream. The
exception to this rule is if the output stream is being mapped as a stream pass
through. When an input stream is passed through to an output stream, the
output stream contains the entire input stream content, and no insertion can
be done on that output stream.
The UDP port used for EAS reception is used solely for EAS reception.
Services, PIDs, and streams cannot be mapped from the EAS UDP port. When
EAS is enabled, the number of Host Ethernet or GigE input streams for
service, PID, and stream mapping is reduced by 1 (1 input stream is reserved
for EAS reception).
The EAS window is illustrated in Figure 4-21 and defined in Table 4-5.

59
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-21 EAS window

60
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-5 EAS window field definitions

Item Definition

Input Interface Indicates the host fast Ethernet or GigE interface designated to
receive the EAS messages.

Ethernet UDP Port Indicates the UDP port designated to receive EAS messages.
The EAS UDP Port must be set to a valid UDP Port range,
outside of the IANA reserved range.
Host Ethernet Valid UDP Port Ranges: 1024 – 65535

GigE Valid UDP Port Ranges: 0 – 65535

Default EAS UDP Port is 5050. This is the industry-standard
EAS UDP port, and it is highly recommended that this UDP
port not be changed.
The EAS UDP port is restricted to receiving EAS messages
only. No service, PID, or stream mappings can be done on the
EAS input stream.

Host Ethernet Multicast IP Indicates the Host Ethernet Multicast IP address designated
to receive EAS messages. If the Multicast IP address is valid,
EAS messages can be received as singlecast, network
broadcast, or multicast on the specified Host Ethernet
interface.
The EAS Multicast IP address must be a valid, non-reserved
multicast address, or set to 0.0.0.0 to indicate not in use.
Reserved: 224.0.0.0 — 224.0.0.255
Valid Range: 224.0.1.0 — 239.255.255.255
Not In Use: 0.0.0.0
To configure a GigE EAS multicast address, use the GigE UDP
Configuration screen. This screen will also allow the user to
setup a redundant EAS input stream.

EAS Enable Checkboxes to enable or disable EAS for each output stream.

EAS Messages Received Indicates the total number of EAS messages received.

SEM System Configuration — Traps

The Traps tab is available in any SEM Device Operating Mode. This window
contains settings for Trap Receivers and Heartbeat.
The Trap Receivers section controls configuration of up to four trap receiver IP
addresses, as well as different throttling rates for each trap receiver.
The Heartbeat section controls configuration of SEM generation of the
Heartbeat trap message. The Heartbeat trap message is an indication that the
SEM is operating. The Heartbeat trap message can be enabled or disabled, and
the interval and destination IP address can be configured.
The Traps window is illustrated in Figure 4-22 and defined in Table 4-6.

61
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-22 Traps window

Table 4-6 Traps window field definitions

Item Definition

Trap Receiver IP Address Indicates the IP address of the destination trap receiver. This
value can be a valid Singlecast or Multicast IP address (class A,
B, C, or D). A value of 0.0.0.0 indicates that no destination
receiver address is defined for the corresponding index.

Trap Receiver Throttling Valid values are 1 – 10, representing the maximum number of
Rate traps the SEM will issue in 1 second (to a specific trap
receiver).

Heartbeat Enabled Indicates heartbeats are enabled; however, destination receiver

addresses must be configured before sending heartbeats.

Heartbeat Interval Specifies how often heartbeats are sent. Values range from

62
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

(Seconds) 0.5 to 300 seconds.

Destination IP #1
Indicates the IP address of the destination receiver. This value
can be a valid Singlecast or Multicast IP address (Class A, B, C
or D). A value of 0.0.0.0 indicates that no destination receiver
address is defined for the corresponding index. If all entries
have a value of 0.0.0.0, heartbeats are not sent.

SEM System Configuration — Advanced

This window allows the user to control the encryption algorithm, insertion
mode, auto-reboot, loss of PSI detection, Cable Encrypt Copy Protection
source, and Cable Encryptor PIM Wildcard parameters.
The Loss of PSI determines when a service that was previously received is no
longer on the input stream. For a service to be remultiplexed by the SEM, the
input PAT must reference the applicable service number. In addition, the input
PMT must be received. The input PAT determines the input PMT PID value.
When Loss of PSI detection is enabled, if either the PAT or the PMT are
determined to be missing, the SEM will stop remultiplexing the service. This
provides the user with a real time update for each service. The Output Program
Status will be updated to reflect any changes to the input stream
(missing/reception of PAT, missing/reception of PMT, and the
processing/validation of the PMT).
The Advanced window is illustrated in Figure 4-23 and defined in Table 4-7.

63
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-23 Advanced window

64
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-7 Advanced window field definitions

Item Definition

*Encryption Algorithm Controls the current scrambling mode of the SEM ACPs.
1 — DES (DCII, North America)
2 — CSA (DVB Common Scrambling Algorithm)
This field is applicable only when the SEM has an ACP
module installed and is either externally controlled or the CTE
mode is enabled.

Message Insertion Mode Sets the message insertion mode as efficient, singleSection,
or twentyByte. The mode designators are:
1. Efficient — messages are inserted as efficiently as
possible. Messages that are on the same PID may
be in the same MPEG packet. This allows for the
most efficient insertion and uses the least amount
of bandwidth.
2. singleSection — message insertion is restricted to a
single section starting a packet. All inserted
messages start on a packet (each MPEG packet
will contain only 1 message). This uses the most
amount of bandwidth.
3. twentyByte — message insertion is restricted to
prevent any section from starting in the last
twenty bytes of a packet. This is the same as
efficient, except that no message can start in the
last 20 bytes of an MPEG packet.
Changes to this parameter take immediate effect.

Copy Protection Source This determines the copy protection source when the SEM is
in Cable Encryptor mode. The Copy Protection source setting
determines how the SEM will update the output ECM (PRK)
messages with CCI, APS, and CIT settings. The user
selections are as follows:
1. External Controller
2. Input Program
The default selection is External Controller. In this mode, the
External Controller, typically a DAC 6000, determines the
copy protection settings. The SEM will insert the ECMs
received from the DAC and will NOT alter the copy
protection settings.
When Input Program is selected, the SEM will use the input
program’s copy protection settings to update the output PRK
messages. In this case, the SEM continuously monitors the
input PMT for a DTCP descriptor and uses those copy
protection settings to update the output PRK. Using this
selection allows the SEM to maintain the copy protection
settings previously defined by an upstream device.
This setting is not selectable or viewable unless the
operating mode is set to Cable Encryptor.

65
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Changes to this parameter take immediate effect.

Detect Loss of Input PSI When enabled, the SEM will detect a loss of an input stream
Enabled or service based on the detection of PSI (PATs and PMTs).
When the SEM detects a loss of an input service, the SEM
will stop multiplexing the service and stop the insertion of
the output PMT for that service. In addition, the output PAT
will be updated to not contain a reference to the service. The
SEM will continue to look for changes on the input stream
and will remultiplex the service if and when the input PAT
and PMT are received.
Changes to this parameter take immediate effect.

Loss of Input PSI Timeout The amount of time after which an input PSI is considered
lost. Valid range is 1 – 21600 seconds. It is highly
recommended that this setting be left at the default value (5
seconds). This setting is only used when loss of PSI
detection is enabled.
Changes to this parameter take immediate effect.

Auto-Reboot Enabled Setting to “enabled” allows the SEM to automatically reboot

when specific SEM hardware errors occur.

Boot Reason Indicates reason for SEM boot:

Power Cycle — Power-up or power cycled.
Operator Reboot — Operator commanded reboot.
ACP FPGA Reprogram — ACP FPGA reprogramming.
Hardware Fault — Automatic reboot occurred

*PIM Wildcard This setting is used in Cable Encryptor mode to override the
program number in the Motorola Program Information
Message (PIM) and Program Name Message (PNM) for each
service. When enabled, the SEM will change the PIM and
PNM program numbers to the wildcard value of 0 (0x0000).
This should only be enabled if the SEM is being used as a
“Central Encryptor” for Impulse Pay Per View (IPPV)
services. In this case, the SEM transmits the encrypted IPPV
service over GigE to another EQAM device that is
multiplexing and performing the QAM modulation function.
This setting is not selectable or viewable unless the
operating mode is set to Cable Encryptor.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

66
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM System Configuration — PID Remapping

This window provides the PID remapping parameters, which are used at
initialization to determine how to partition the elementary range of 4096 PIDs.
When remapping PIDs, the elementary PID range is partitioned into services
with an equal distribution of available PIDs.
Note: PID re-mapping must be enabled when the SEM is operating in
SimulCrypt mode.
Figure 4-24 PID Remapping window

Table 4-8 PID Remapping Definitions

Item Definition

Output Interface

Pid Remapping Enabled When enabled, the SEM uses the output PIDs from a
predetermined range of PIDs for services and ancillary PIDs on
the Output Interface. The output PID values for PMTs and all
components will be determined by the SEM.
In addition, when enabled, the SEM is able to perform PID mask
encryption (allows for encrypting large numbers of PIDs using
fewer ACP resources).
When disabled, the output PIDs for all services and ancillary PIDs
on the Output Interface are the same as the input PID values. The
output PID values for PMTs and all components will be identical
to the input PMT and component PID values. In addition, PID
mask encryption cannot be performed.

67
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

When PID Remapping is disabled, the user must ensure that the
services mapped from multiple inputs do not have PID conflicts;
otherwise, the SEM maps the first service if there are PID
conflicts on multiple services.
It is highly recommended that the SEM be used with PID
Remapping enabled. This will ensure that there are no PID
conflicts on an output stream.

PIDs Per Program Specifies how many PIDs are to be allocated for each service on
the Output Interface. The elementary PID range consists of 4096
available PIDs. The SEM must be rebooted for this change to
take effect.
Elementary PID range (4096 PIDs) partitioning is as follows:
PIDs Per x Multiplexed Services = Range
Program (Number of Programs)
16 x 252 maximum = 4032
32 x 128 = 4096
48 x 85 = 4080
64 x 64 = 4096
80 x 51 = 4080
96 x 42 = 4032
112 x 36 = 4032
128 x 32 = 4096
144 x 28 = 4032
160 x 25 = 4000
176 x 23 = 4048
192 x 21 = 4032
200 x 20 = 4160

Number of Programs View-only field that indicates the number of output services as
determined by the number of PIDs per service set with Total PIDs
Per Program. For multiplexes with many services that have few
PIDs per service, the value 16 set in Total PIDs Per Program
causes a value up to 252 multiplexed services to appear in this
field.

Config All Opens a new window that allows the user to configure all
“Enable” and “PIDs Per Program” fields to the same values.

68
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

69
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM Input/Output Configuration — ASI Ports

This window provides the capability to enable each of the ASI ports. When
configuring an ASI port for output, the output stream also must be configured
as an ASI output. This is done in the Output Stream Configuration window
(output streams 1–4 can be assigned to ASI ports 5–8). The ASI Ports window
is illustrated in Figure 4-25 and defined in Table 4-9.
Figure 4-25 ASI Ports window

70
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-9 ASI Ports window field definitions

Item Definition

*ASI Input Ports 1 — 4 Drop-down list selections are Disabled and Enabled as Input. Ports
one through four can be configured for input only.

*ASI I/O Ports 5 — 8 Drop-down list selections are Disabled, Enabled as Input, and
Enabled as Output. Ports five through eight can be configured for
input or output.
To fully configure an ASI port to be used for an output, the ASI
port must be configured as an output port and the corresponding
output stream must be selected as an ASI output (refer to the
Output Configuration window).

ASI LEDs LEDs for each ASI port have the following significance:
LED Color Indicates
Red ASI input port (1-8) or output port (5-
8) is enabled, but not active.
Green ASI input port (1-8) is enabled as an
input and is active.
Yellow ASI output port (5-8) is enabled as
an output and is active.
Gray ASI port is disabled.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

71
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM Input/Output Configuration — Gigabit Ethernet

The Gigabit Ethernet window defines enabling functionality of GigE-1 through
GigE-3. It also provides the network particulars of GigE-1 through GigE-3. The
Gigabit Ethernet window is illustrated in Figure 4-26 and defined in Table 4-10.
Figure 4-26 Gigabit Ethernet window

72
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-10 Gigabit Ethernet window field definitions

Item Definition

Input UDP Invokes the GigE Input UDP Port Configuration window, which is
Configuration illustrated in Figure 4-30.

Jitter Absorption This is the amount of network jitter the SEM can tolerate. It is used by
the SEM to calculate the initial Gigabit Ethernet frame buffer level. It is
highly recommended that this parameter not be changed (leave at
50ms). The Jitter absorption setting is used to set the initial GigE frame
buffer level. The higher the jitter absorption setting, the more the frame
buffer level is increased (decreasing the number of Ethernet frames the
GigE can receive and dejitter at one time).

Multicast Time to Multicast transmit Time to Live setting from 0 to 255 seconds. This
Live (0 — 255) parameter takes immediate effect; however, it must be saved to
persist through subsequent reboots.

*GigE Default The IP address of the default gateway of GigE-1 through GigE-3.
Gateway

GigE 1-3 LEDs LEDs for each GigE have the following significance:
LED Color Indicates
Red GigE is enabled as an input port or an
output port, but is not active or no SFP
is installed.
Green GigE is enabled as an input port and is
active.
Yellow GigE is enabled as an output port and is
active.
Gray GigE port is disabled.

*Port Mode Enables GigE-1 through GigE-3. All GigE interfaces can be configured
for input and output. Only the first and second GigEs can be configured
for loop-through.
Drop-down list selections are:
• Disabled
• Enabled as I/O
• Enabled as LoopThru (input only)
• LT Terminator (Loop-through Terminator – applies only to GigE1 and
GigE2 for loop-through; input only)
*No. of Input TS Number of input transport streams per GigE interface (number of UDP
ports). The maximum number of transport streams (384) cannot be
exceeded for all three ports. If a single port is set to 384, the other two
ports must each be 0.
The number of input transport streams is the number of UDP Ports that
the SEM can open across all GigE interfaces. There is a 1-to-1
correlation between a UDP port and an input transport stream. This
means that the SEM can only support the reception of 1 SPTS or MPTS
per UDP port (per interface).

MAC Address View only MAC addresses of GigE-1 through GigE-3. These addresses
are also provided on the serial number label on the bottom of the SEM.
The addresses are set at the factory and cannot be changed. The string
73
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

length is 17 characters in the format ‘hh:hh:hh:hh:hh:hh.,’ where ‘hh’ is

a hexadecimal number.

*IP Address The IP address of GigE-1 through GigE-3. The IP address of each
enabled GigE interface must be set to a valid class A, B, or C address.
It is highly recommended that each GigE interface be configured on a
separate network. The GigE stack contains 1 routing table. Therefore,
each GigE interface should be on a separate network.
When using a SEM to transmit singlecast packets on more than 1 GigE
output interface, then the GigE interfaces must be configured on
separate networks. The GigE uses its internal network routing table to
determine which interface to transmit packets, and if the 2 interfaces
are on the same network, then the GigE will only transmit the packets
out the first interface.
Multicast transmission requires that the user configure the specific
interface to transmit on for each multicast destination IP.

*Subnet Mask The subnet mask of GigE-1 through GigE-3.

*Auto Negotiation Indicates if auto negotiation is enabled or disabled. Auto negotiation is

automatically disabled when a GigE interface is configured in LoopThru
or LT Terminator mode.

Interface When enabled, the middle panel GigE-1 and GigE-2 fields are combined
Redundancy and the lower window panel is activated. When Interface Redundancy
is enabled, both GigE-1 and GigE-2 ports are configured with the same
network information (IP address, MAC address, and subnet mask). The
MAC address for both ports is the MAC address of GigE-1. The Gigabit
Ethernet Interface Redundancy window is illustrated in Figure 4-27.

Config Routes Invokes the GigE Routing Table Configuration window, which is
illustrated in Figure 4-28.
Config ARP Invokes the GigE Static ARP Table Configuration window, which is
illustrated in Figure 4-29.
Config GigE Opens the GigE VLAN/CFM Configuration window.
VLAN/CFM

IGMP Invokes the IGMP Configuration window.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

74
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM Input/Output Configuration — Gigabit Ethernet Interface Redundancy

When Gigabit Ethernet Interface Redundancy is enabled (dropdown menu), the
middle panel GigE-1 and GigE-2 fields are combined, and the lower window
panel is activated. With Interface Redundancy, both GigE-1 and GigE-2 carry
the same transport streams in the event the Primary GigE interface loses input
or suffers degeneration above a specified Threshold percentage. The
designated primary GigE is monitored as determined from the Fail Over
Monitor Period, which can be from 1 to 30 seconds. Five samples are taken, 1
every 200ms, at every monitor period interval.
If the Threshold is exceeded, Fail Over to the other GigE interface occurs. For
example, if the threshold is set to 90%, then the content of the in use GigE
interface must fall below 90% of the content of the back up interface before a
fail over will occur. Fail Over to the backup GigE can also be forced through
button selection. The Suspend Fail Over check box, when active (check mark),
prevents Fail Over from occurring. The Gigabit Ethernet Interface Redundancy
window is illustrated in Figure 4-27.
It should be noted that when Gigabit Ethernet Interface Redundancy is enabled
the SEM cannot be configured for Gigabit Ethernet MPTS Redundancy
(configured on the Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Configuration window).
Figure 4-27 Gigabit Ethernet window with Interface Redundancy enabled

To supplement the Gigabit Ethernet window field definitions provided in Table

4-10, Gigabit Ethernet Interface Redundancy window field definitions are listed
in Table 4-11.

75
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-11 Redundant Gigabit Ethernet window field definitions

Item Definition

*Interface Drop list that selects whether Ethernet Frame Counts or MPEG Null
Redundancy Packet Counts are monitored and used to determine failover while in
Gigabit Ethernet Interface Redundancy mode. This field is always
active.
When MPEG Null Packet Counts is selected, the SEM will compare
the counts of the number of MPEG packets received on all open
UDP ports. The total amount of MPEG packets received on GigE 1 is
compared to the total amount of MPEG packets received on GigE 2.

*Primary GigE Radio buttons to select either GigE 1 or GigE 2 as the Primary GigE
Interface interface to be monitored for Threshold deviation.

Suspend Fail Over Prevents Fail Over from occurring, even if the primary GigE exceeds
Threshold deviation.

Threshold (%) The amount of deviation in Mbps between the primary and
secondary streams before the SEM activates an alarm. When the
SEM threshold is exceeded, the SEM will fail over to the backup
GigE interface (assuming fail over is not suspended).
The Threshold % is used to determine when to fail over to the
backup interface using the following calculation:
Fail Over = In Use Count < (Backup Count * Threshold/100).
The higher the threshold, the more likely a fail over will occur. The
lower the threshold, the less chance of a fail over, but a greater loss
of data will occur until the fail over.

Fail Over Monitor Selected Threshold check period from 1 to 30 seconds. Five samples
Period are taken, 1 every 200ms, at every monitor period interval.

Force Fail Over Causes Fail Over to the secondary GigE, even though Threshold was
not exceeded.

Current Interface in Indicates the current GigE transport stream provider, which can differ
Use from the primary GigE interface if Fail Over occurred.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

76
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Routing Table Configuration

Clicking the Config Routes button on the SEM Input/Output Configuration–
Gigabit Ethernet window causes the GigE Routing Table Configuration window
to display.
The network IP, subnet mask, and gateway IP can be associated to 16 GigE
services from this window for static routes. The GigE Routing Table
Configuration window is illustrated in Figure 4-28 and defined in Table 4-12.
Figure 4-28 GigE Routing Table Configuration window

77
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-12 GigE Routing Table Configuration window field definitions

Item Definition

Network IP The GigE Ethernet routing destination network

IP address for the service.

Subnet Mask When masking is employed, it indicates the

network address and host ID portion of the IP
address.

Gateway IP The GigE Ethernet routing destination gateway

IP address for the service.

Delete Expedites clearing fields; check the boxes of

those fields to be cleared to zeros, and click
Apply.

78
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Static ARP Table Configuration

Clicking the Config ARP button on the SEM Input/Output Configuration —
Gigabit Ethernet window causes the GigE Static ARP Table Configuration
window to display.
This window associates a MAC address to an IP for GigE transmission. It is
used to return a MAC for one-way traffic that prohibits an ARP reply (for
example, SEMs in a daisy chain). The GigE Static ARP Table Configuration
window is illustrated in Figure 4-29 and defined in Table 4-13.
Figure 4-29 GigE Static ARP Table Configuration window

79
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-13 GigE Static ARP Table Configuration window field definitions
Item Definition

IP Address IP address of GigE target device on network.

MAC Address MAC address of GigE target device on

network.

Delete Expedites clearing fields; check the boxes of

those fields to be cleared to zeros, and click
Apply.

GigE Input UDP Configuration

This window is used to select a GigE Input UDP screen. The Gigabit Ethernet
Input UDP Configuration window, Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Status window,
and Commanded Gigabit Ethernet Status window are accessed through this
screen using the drop-down boxes.
Selecting a range of rows to display from one of the drop-down boxes will
open a new window.
Figure 4-30 GigE Input UDP Configuration Window

80
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-14 GigE Input UDP Configuration field definitions

Item Definition

UDP Configuration Selects the range of rows to display in the Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP
Configuration window, which is illustrated in Figure 4-31.

UDP Status Selects the range of rows to display in the Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP
Status window, which is illustrated in Figure 4-32. These are all GigE
inputs that have been configured in the GigE UDP configuration table.

Commanded Status Selects the range of rows to display in the Commanded Gigabit Ethernet
Status window, which is illustrated in Figure 4-33.

Monitoring Period This is the time in seconds over which Redundant Gigabit Ethernet UDP
Port Pairs will be monitored. Range is 1 to 30 seconds.

Auto-Switchback Hold Time This is the time in seconds to wait before switching back to the Primary
of a Redundant Gigabit Ethernet UDP Port pair after the Primary is
healthy. Range is 0 to 3600.

Error Log Invokes the Error Log window, which is illustrated in Figure 4-34.

GigE MPTS Redundancy

This feature allows a user to configure multiple GigE input transport streams
pairs as Primary and Secondary inputs. This allows the SEM to perform
redundancy on individual GigE input streams (MPTS or SPTS), rather than on
an entire GigE interface. Each GigE input stream pair is monitored separately
from other redundancy pairs. The SEM supports both GigE Interface
Redundancy and MPTS Redundancy, but does not support both modes of
operation at the same time. The user must decide to place the GigE in
Interface Redundancy mode or setup GigE Redundancy pairs.
The main features of GigE MPTS Redundancy are:
• Supports up to 192 redundant GigE input stream pairs (384 total GigE input
streams)
• Monitors streams by either comparing their Data Rate (all non-Null packets)
or Transport Stream rate (all packets including Null packets)
• Supports redundant singlecast or multicast input streams
• Supports comparison of either STPS or MPTS input streams
• Supports MPEG packet counting and comparison of input streams every
200ms (minimum of 5 consecutive comparisons, 1 second, required for
threshold or failover detection)
• Supports alarming and reporting of low bit rate for any input stream
• Supports alarming and reporting of redundancy failovers and threshold
violations
• Supports monitoring and reporting of individual input stream data and/or
stream rates

81
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

• Supports suspending of failover and force failover for individual redundant

pairs
• Supports configuration of threshold setting for stream comparison
• Supports configuration of redundancy monitor period (1 – 30 seconds)
• Supports configuration of fallback to Primary delay time (1 – 3600 seconds)

GigE MPTS Redundancy Processing

The SEM performs GigE MPTS redundancy checking by continuously counting
the number of MPEG packets received from each input stream. This is done for
all GigE input streams, even those streams that are not configured for
redundancy. The raw MPEG packet counts are used to derive an input stream
data rate that is reported for each input stream.
Data rates and total input stream rates are calculated based on the raw MPEG
packet counts accumulated every 5 seconds. The current, average, minimum,
and peak rates reported by the SEM for each UDP port are then calculated and
stored internally. These values are accessible via SNMP (SEM EM).
Redundancy threshold and failover monitoring is also done using the raw
MPEG packet counts. However, these counts are compared on the GigE
processor every 200ms. The GigE uses the user configured threshold
percentage to compare the Primary vs. the Secondary input streams. The
monitor period is then used to determine how many consecutive 200ms
comparisons are needed to determine if the Primary is above or below the
threshold. For example, at a 1 second monitoring period, 5 consecutive 200ms
comparisons are performed. After this period, the SEM determines if a
threshold change has occurred and if a failover to the secondary MPTS or
fallback to the primary MPTS is required.
During a failover or fallback, the SEM will remove all GigE input stream
commands from the current in use stream (stop all extractions, stop all stream
pass throughs, stop all PID aliasing and mapping, and stop all service
mappings). The SEM will then restart all commands on the redundant input
stream previously marked as backup (restart all service and PID mappings,
along with all stream pass throughs and extractions). During a failover or
fallback, there will be a momentary loss of video (the transition to the backup
input stream will occur within 500ms; depending on the frequency of PSI
messages). The transition time is in addition to the monitoring period.

GigE Input Stream Status Monitoring

As part of the GigE MPTS Redundancy feature, the SEM reports the input UDP
port data and/or stream rate of all GigE input streams in use. This is done for all
GigE input streams, even those that have not been configured for multicast or
configured as redundant streams. The input stream rate is calculated by
counting the number of MPEG packets received over a 5 second status period.
The rate is then calculated by converting the MPEG packet counts into
Megabits per second (Mbps).

82
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Input Stream Low Bit Rate Alarm

Additionally, a user can configure any GigE input stream to have the input rate
monitored for a low bit rate. This is done by using the same screen as
redundancy is configured, but the user only needs to select a low bit rate and a
comparison type (data rate or stream rate). The SEM will alarm and trap
whenever any GigE input stream falls below the specified low bit rate. An
overall alarm is maintained to indicate the status of all input streams being
monitored. Traps are issued for each input stream when the alarm condition for
that input stream changes.
Low Bit Rate Error Factor
The low bit rate checking uses a 5% error factor based on the user entered
input rate. Since the input GigE packet counts are done prior to network
dejittering, due to fluctuations in the network, the low bit rate needs to allow
for variations in the actual rate. The SEM takes the user entered rate and
multiplies this by 95% to calculate the actual rate that will be used for
comparison against the actual input rate. This 5% error factor allows for enough
deviation to prevent unwanted alarms while at the same time allowing for the
alarming of real low bit rate streams.
The 5% error factor is done internally by the SEM rather than requiring a user
to know what a specific input rate should be. Typically, for an input stream rate
of 38.81, various users would enter this low bit rate as; 38.8, 38.8107, 38.0,
etc. This 5% error factor removes this issue from the user, and will prevent
inadvertent alarms.
An example of this factor for the above rates would yield the following low bit
rate alarm levels:
• 38.8 Mbps = 36.86 Mbps
• 38.81 Mbps = 36.8695 Mbps
• 38.0 Mbps = 36.1 Mbps

GigE MPTS Alarms and Traps

There are three alarms and traps that are associated with GigE MPTS
redundancy and input stream monitoring. These alarms and traps inform the
user whenever a threshold event has occurred, a Primary to Secondary failover
event occurred, or when a GigE input stream low bit rate event occurred. For
each type of trap issued, the trap will contain; the index into the GigE UDP
configuration table, the GigE interface, and the GigE UDP port.
The threshold alarm is set to critical whenever any Primary input stream falls
below the specified threshold percentage. The alarm is cleared when all
Primary input streams are above the threshold level. A trap is issued for each
threshold event. This alarm can also be manually cleared by the user via the
SEM EM.
The Primary Failover to Backup alarm is set to critical whenever any Primary
input stream fails over to the backup (secondary) stream. The alarm is cleared
83
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

when all redundant pairs fallback to the Primary input stream. A trap is issued
for each failover event. This alarm can also be manually cleared by the user via
the SEM EM.
The low bit rate alarm is set to critical whenever any GigE input stream falls
below the specified input data rate. For MPTS Redundancy, this alarm is meant
to be used to notify a user when the Secondary stream is no longer available.
However, this alarm can be used to indicate a low Primary input rate as well, in
the case where the data rate drops at the same time for both the Primary and
Secondary input streams. The alarm is cleared when all input streams are
above the specific low bit rate. A trap is issued for each low bit rate event. This
alarm can also be manually cleared by the user via the SEM EM.
Figure 4-31 Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Configuration Window

84
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-15 GigE Ethernet Input UDP Configuration Window field definitions
Item Definition

Clear Checking this box and pressing the Apply button will cause the
selected row’s data to be returned to initial values.

GigE Interface The Gigabit Ethernet physical port that will receive packets.
Select an Enabled GigE Interface or N/A to disable a row

UDP Port The Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Port (0 - 65535).

Multicast IP The Multicast receive IP address:

Valid Range: 224.0.1.0 – 239.255.255.255
Reserved: 224.0.0.0 – 224.0.0.255
Not used: 0.0.0.0
Note: The SEM only supports reception of one Multicast input
stream per GigE interface and UDP port combination. The user
cannot specify to receive the same multicast stream from the same
UDP port on the same GigE interface.

Source IP This is the IP address of the source device. Source IP address must
be a valid singlecast address.

Alarm Bit Rate (Mbps) Set this to the LOWEST bit rate that is expected from the input
stream. This rate sets a Low Alarm Bit Rate at which the SEM will
alarm if the input falls below this rate. If no alarm is desired, set this
field to 0.0 to disable the alarm checking.
The bit rate checking is done on either the Data Rate (non-NULL) or
TS Rate, depending on the Compare Type selected.
This alarm is useful to notify a user when an input has dropped
below an expected rate (loss of data).

Compare Type For Redundancy comparison, the Primary Compare Type setting is
the comparison type that will be used when comparing the input
Primary stream against the input Secondary stream.
For Primary input streams, a Compare Type MUST be selected
(select either Data Rate or TS Rate).
Select Data Rate if the comparison desired is to compare the data
rate of the input stream. The data rate includes all non-Null PIDs (all
video, audio, data, and PSI PIDs).
Select TS Rate if the comparison desired is the entire input
transport stream rate. This includes the Data rate plus all Null PIDs.
This should be selected if the input stream is always null filled.
For Secondary and non-Redundancy input streams, the Compare
Type is used determine the Low Bit Rate Alarm. Select N/A if NO
low bit rate checking is desired.

Redundancy Pair Enabling this automatically configures the two associated rows as
Primary and Secondary (Primary rows are always on top and are odd
numbered). This setting also automatically sets the Compare Type
to Data Rate if previously set to N/A (a Comparison Type is
necessary for Redundancy configuration).

85
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Redundancy Selection Specifies whether this port is a Primary or a Secondary.

The odd rows of the table (1, 3, 5, etc.) must be 'primary' or
'notApplicable'. The even rows of the table (2, 4, 6, etc.) must be
'secondary' or N/A'. For a pair to be in MPTS Redundant mode the
odd must be 'primary' and the even row must be 'secondary'. If
either row is 'N/A' the SEM will restore the row to previous valid
values. If this occurs at Bootup, there are no previous valid values;
therefore the SEM will clear the rows.

Redundancy Threshold This is used only for Redundancy comparisons only (Primary input
(%) stream setting). It is used to compare the Primary vs. the Secondary
to determine when to fail over from the Primary to the Secondary or
back to the Primary.
Fail over comparison is done as follows: Primary rate < (Secondary
rate * Threshold/100)

UDP Port State The current state of the Gigabit Ethernet UDP Port configured on the
same row index in semGbeInputUdpConfigTable. States are:
• Closed - UDP Port is closed or table row is not in use.
• Open In Use - UDP Port is opened and in use.
• Open Backup - UDP Port is opened as backup only.
• Trans Backup - UDP Port is opened, transitioning to backup state.
• Trans In Use - UDP Port is opened, transitioning to in use state.

The states “Open Backup”, “Trans Backup”, and “Trans In Use”

apply only to Redundant Pairs (Redundancy Selection 'primary' or
'secondary').
“Open Backup” applies to the UDP Port of the pair that is not
currently in use.
“Trans Backup” applies to the UDP Port of the pair that is currently
in use but is transitioning to be the backup, as when a Fail Over or
Switch Back is occurring.
“Trans In Use” applies to the UDP Port of the pair that is currently
the backup use but is transitioning to be the in use, as when a Fail
Over or Switch Back is occurring.

Config All Opens a new window that allows the user to configure all “Alarm Bit
Rate” and “Threshold” and “Compare Type” fields at once.

Help Opens a new window that displays usage information.

When configuring a Primary and Secondary row for the first time, the Primary
input stream can already be opened and in use (services routed from input to
output). The Secondary input (GigE interface and UDP Port) cannot currently be
in use. The SEM will automatically open the Secondary UDP port once the
Redundancy pair is configured. All service and stream mapping commands are
done using the Primary input stream, and the SEM will determine based on
rate comparison which input stream to actually use.

86
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

To remove a row that is currently in use, set the GigE interface to N/A or select
the Clear check box; then select Apply. To remove a Primary row, the
Secondary must also be removed at the same time.
The GigE Interface and UDP Port cannot be changed for any row that currently
is in use (UDP Port opened). The user must remove the row first (select Clear
check box or set GigE Interface to N/A), then change the GigE Interface and/or
UDP Port. All other fields can be changed while the input stream is in use. An
in use input stream is any row that has the UDP Port State set to anything but
Closed.

Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Status Window

The rates reported on this screen display the Data Rate or TS Rate for each
UDP Port, depending on the Compare Type, previously selected by the user. If
no Compare Type has been selected, the Data Rate is always displayed.
Note that only input streams that have been configured via the GigE Input UDP
Configuration screen are displayed on this screen. Any GigE input streams that
are currently in use, but not configured, are displayed on the Commanded
Status screen.
All rates reported (current, average, minimum, and peak) are done by counting
the number of MPEG packets received. The current rate is the number of
MPEG packets received over a 5 second status monitoring period, converted to
Mbps. This is simply the total number of MPEG packets received in the last 5
seconds, divided by the number of bits per MPEG packet. Therefore, the
current rate cannot show instantaneous peaks or drops in the input rate. The
average, minimum, and peak rates are all calculated using a 15 minute sliding
window. The minimum and peak are the lowest rate and highest rates in the
last 15 minutes, while the average rate is the average input data rate over the
last 15 minutes.

87
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-32 Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Status Window

88
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-16 GigE Ethernet Input UDP Status Window field definitions
Item Definition

Gige Interface The Gigabit Ethernet physical port that will receive packets.

UDP Port The Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Port (0 - 65535).

Redundancy Selection Specifies whether this port is a Primary or a Secondary.

Current Rate (Mbps) Data rate of the most recent sample in Mbps.
Note: Rate displayed is either the data rate or transport stream rate,
depending on the compare type configured. If no compare type was
configured, then the data rate is displayed.

Average Rate (Mbps) Average data rate over the sampling period in Mbps.
Note: Rate displayed is either the data rate or transport stream rate,
depending on the compare type configured. If no compare type was
configured, then the data rate is displayed.

Minimum Rate (Mbps) Minimum data rate over the sampling period in Mbps.
Note: Rate displayed is either the data rate or transport stream rate,
depending on the compare type configured. If no compare type was
configured, then the data rate is displayed.

Peak Rate (Mbps) Maximum data rate over the sampling period in Mbps.
Note: Rate displayed is either the data rate or transport stream rate,
depending on the compare type configured. If no compare type was
configured, then the data rate is displayed.

UDP Port State The current state of the Gigabit Ethernet UDP Port configured on the
same row index in semGbeInputUdpConfigTable. States are:
• Closed - UDP Port is closed or table row is not in use.
• Open In Use - UDP Port is opened and in use.
• Open Backup - UDP Port is opened as backup only.
• Trans Backup - UDP Port is opened, transitioning to backup state.
• Trans In Use - UDP Port is opened, transitioning to in use state.

The states “Open Backup”, “Trans Backup”, and “Trans In Use” apply
only to Redundant Pairs (Redundancy Selection 'primary' or
'secondary').
“Open Backup” applies to the UDP Port of the pair that is not currently
in use.
“Trans Backup” applies to the UDP Port of the pair that is currently in
use but is transitioning to be the backup, as when a Fail Over or Switch
Back is occurring.
“Trans In Use” applies to the UDP Port of the pair that is currently the
backup use but is transitioning to be the in use, as when a Fail Over or
Switch Back is occurring.

Force Forces a Redundancy pair to fail over to the input stream that is currently
not in use.
When forcing a fail over from the Primary to the Secondary, the SEM will
use the Secondary input stream, regardless of the threshold and
comparison. Once a user has forced the Secondary to be used, the SEM
89
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

will remain on the Secondary input stream until the user forces the SEM
back to the Primary input stream.
Forcing the SEM back to the Primary input stream returns the SEM back
to normal Redundancy comparison mode. The SEM will continue to
compare the Primary vs. the Secondary and fail over as necessary.

Suspend Fail Over Enabling Suspend on an in use Primary or Secondary input stream will
result in the SEM not failing over to the other stream. The SEM will
remain on the in use stream regardless of the threshold and comparison.

Help Opens a new window that displays usage information.

Force All to Primary Forces all Redundancy pairs to fail over to the Primary stream.

Force All to Secondary Forces all Redundancy pairs to fail over to the Secondary stream.

Commanded Gigabit Ethernet UDP Status

The rates reported on this screen display the Data Rate or TS Rate for each
UDP Port, depending on the Compare Type, previously selected by the user. If
no Compare Type has been selected, the Data Rate is always displayed.
This screen only displays those input streams that have NOT been configured
using the GigE Input UDP Configuration screen. This screen displays
information for GigE inputs that have not been configured by the user for:
MPTS redundancy, input stream monitoring, or multicast reception.
All rates reported (current, average, minimum, and peak) are done by counting
the number of MPEG packets received. The current rate is the number of
MPEG packets received over a 5 second status monitoring period, converted to
Mbps. This is simply the total number of MPEG packets received in the last 5
seconds, divided by the number of bits per MPEG packet. Therefore, the
current rate cannot show instantaneous peaks or drops in the input rate. The
average, minimum, and peak rates are all calculated using a 15 minute sliding
window. The minimum and peak are the lowest rate and highest rates in the
last 15 minutes, while the average rate is the average input data rate over the
last 15 minutes.

90
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-33 Commanded Gigabit Ethernet UDP Status Window

91
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-17 Commanded Gigabit Ethernet UDP Status window field definitions
Item Definition

GigE Interface GigE physical port

UDP Port GigE Input UDP Port (0 - 65535).

Current Data Rate (Mbps) Data rate of the most recent sample in Mbps.

Average Data Rate (Mbps) Average data rate over the sampling period in Mbps.

Minimum Data Rate (Mbps) Minimum data rate over the sampling period in Mbps.

Peak Data Rate (Mbps) Maximum data rate over the sampling period in Mbps.

Current Stream Rate (Mbps) Stream rate of the most recent sample in Mbps.

Average Stream Rate (Mbps) Average stream rate over the sampling period in Mbps.

Minimum Stream Rate (Mbps) Minimum stream rate over the sampling period in Mbps.

Peak Stream Rate (Mbps) Maximum stream rate over the sampling period in Mbps.

92
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Error Log Window

Only input streams that were configured via the GigE Input UDP Configuration
screen can have entries on this screen. If the input stream is removed from
the GigE Input UDP Configuration screen, entries appearing on this screen are
not removed.
This log is listed in reverse chronological order when the window is first
opened. It can contain a limited number of entries. If the log fills, the oldest
entries are deleted to make room for new entries.
The user may select a column header to display the list sorted on that column.
Figure 4-34 Error Log Window

Table 4-18 Error Log Window

Item Definition

Interface GigE physical port

UDP Port GigE Input UDP Port

Event Code The event code specifies which error occurred for this entry in
the error log. Possible error codes are
• 8025 — GigE Input Low Bit Rate
• 8026 — GigE MPTS Redundant Primary Below Threshold
• 8027 — GigE MPTS Redundant Primary Fail Over to
Secondary
• 8028 — GigE Input High Bit Rate (only ISA Switched Digital
Video SEM Device Operating Mode)
Severity Alarm severity level of this event.

Port State State of UDP Port at the time this entry was created

Rate Type Type of rate displayed in the Current Rate Field. This field can
be Data Rate or TS Rate

Current Rate The rate reported is the Data Rate or TS Rate for each UDP
93
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Port, depending on the Rate Type shown. If Rate Type is N/A,

the Data Rate is displayed.

GPS Time GPS time that this entry was created in the error log.
If GPS time is not available, the SEM starts at GPS time zero,
which is January 6, 1980.

Help Opens a new window that displays usage information.

IGMP Configuration
Clicking the IGMP button on the SEM Input/Output Configuration Gigabit
Ethernet window causes the IGMP Configuration window to display.
Each GigE interface can be set to a default IGMP level (v1, v2, or v3). The SEM
will use this configuration for its initial IGMP level. Each GigE interface can also
be configured to maintain a static IGMP version or an autonomous IGMP
version. When statically configured, the SEM will use the IGMP version as
specified by the user. The GigE network in this case must be the same as the
SEM GigE interface setting. When autonomously configured (default), the SEM
will set an initial IGMP version to use, but will switch to use the version
supported by the specific GigE interface network. This window also displays
the current IGMP level based on the network used by the GigE interface. This
window is illustrated in Figure 4-35 and defined in Table 4-19.
Figure 4-35 IGMP Configuration Window

94
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-36 Gigabit Ethernet Multicast Advanced Configuration window

Table 4-19 Gigabit Ethernet Multicast Advanced Configuration window field definitions
Item Definition

IGMP Version Selects the default IGMP version for each GigE interface, along
with a static or autonomous setting.
The default is autonomous, where the GigE interface will use the
default IGMP version but will switch to support the IGMP version
based on the GigE interface network.
Changes to this setting take immediate effect.

IGMP Version In Use The current IGMP version in use on each GigE interface based on
the attached network.

95
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Gigabit Ethernet VLAN/CFM Configuration

Clicking the Config VLAN/CFM button on the SEM Input/Output Configuration–
Gigabit Ethernet window causes the Gigabit Ethernet VLAN/CFM Configuration
window to display.
Each GigE output singlecast or multicast Ethernet stream can be configured to
use IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tags. The VLAN tags can be used to link a given
multicast stream with associated CFM messages being transmitted on a Well-
Known Ethernet multicast stream. The CFM messages include status
information pertaining to one or more MPTS(s), depending on whether the
MPTSs share the same VLAN tag. The VLAN ID (VID) included in a particular
CFM message links the status information to the MPTS(s) being transmitted
with the same VID in the tagged multicast Ethernet frames.
It is highly recommended that these settings remain disabled unless the user
has a full understanding of VLAN tagging and CFM insertion. The insertion of
VLAN tags into a network stream increases the size of each Ethernet frame,
and the network must be able to fully support, VLAN tags. Insertion of VLAN
tags onto a network that cannot support VLAN tags will cause the network to
become corrupted and unusable. This window is illustrated in Figure 4-37 and
defined in Table 4-20.
Figure 4-37 Add VLAN/CFM window

96
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-20 Gigabit VLAN/CFM Configuration window field definitions

Item Definition

VLAN Tagging Enabled Enables or disables VLAN Tagging.

Warning: Do not enable VLAN Tagging unless the network
stream is capable of receiving and handling Ethernet frames with
VLAN tags.

VLAN Tagging Priority Defines the VLAN Tag priority value (1 – 7). This is the value of
the priority field placed into each VLAN Tagged Ethernet frame.

CFM Insertion Enabled Enables or disables CFM Insertion. To enable CFM Insertion,
VLAN Tagging must also be enabled.
CFM Insertion is used to contain the health status for each
output stream. The VLAN ID associates a specific CFM message
with an output stream containing VLAN tags.
Unless there is a specific need to carry CFM messages, CFM
Insertion should remain disabled.

CFM Insertion Period (ms) Number of milliseconds between each CFM insertion (100ms –
60000ms). Entries must be in increments of 100ms.
It is recommended that the default value of 200ms not be
changed.

CFM Insertion MAC Destination MAC Address of each CFM inserted message. The
Address first 3 bytes are fixed and cannot be configured by the user.

97
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Gigabit Ethernet VLAN/CFM Status

Clicking the VLAN/CFM Status tab causes the Gigabit Ethernet VLAN/CFM
Status window to display. This window displays the GigE output VLAN
information (VLAN ID and VLAN Opcode), along with information showing the
GigE output destination IP, UDP port, and interface. Additionally, this window
allows the user to configure the VLAN ID.
This window can also be used for non-VLAN/CFM functionality. This window
displays the specific GigE interface, the destination IP address, and the
destination UDP port for each GigE output stream. This information pertains to
all GigE output streams, regardless of the VLAN or CFM configuration settings.
The GigE output information is only valid after a GigE output stream has been
configured and is currently mapped (service or stream is mapped to the GigE
output). This window is illustrated in Figure 4-38 and defined in Table 4-21.
Figure 4-38 VLAN/CFM Status window

98
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-21 Gigabit VLAN/CFM Status window field definitions

Item Definition

Output TS GigE Port The output stream (1—16), along with the physical GigE interface.
The GigE interface is only displayed when a stream, service, and/or
PID is currently mapped to the specific GigE output.
The interface is determined by the GigE network routing table for
singlecast destinations. For multicast destinations, this is the GigE
interface as configured by the user.

Destination IP Address The destination IP address of the GigE output stream. When in an
internal operating mode, this is the destination IP as configured by
the user. When in an external operating mode, such as Cable
Encryptor, this is the destination IP as configured by the external
controller.

Destination UDP Port The destination UDP port of the GigE output stream. When in an
internal operating mode, this is the destination UDP port as
configured by the user. When in an external operating mode, such
as Cable Encryptor, this is the destination UDP port as configured
by the external controller.

VLAN VID Type This field determines how the VLAN ID will be configured. The
user can select to specify the VLAN ID of each output stream or
allow the SEM to calculate the VLAN ID. When calculated, the
SEM uses the destination UDP port as part of the VLAN ID
(12 LSBs of UDP port).
It is highly recommended to let the SEM calculate the VLAN ID and
that each VLAN ID be unique. If VLAN IDs are not unique, then
only 1 CFM message associated with the VLAN ID will be inserted
for all output streams sharing the same VLAN ID. Sharing
VLAN IDs across multiple output streams may cause issues with
downstream systems attempting to determine the health status of
a specific output stream. The health status of all streams sharing a
VLAN ID is set to unhealthy if any of the streams are unhealthy.
For this reason, each output stream should be associated with a
unique VLAN ID.
This setting takes immediate affect.

VLAN User VID When the VLAN VID Type is User VID, this field is the
user-specified VLAN ID. The VLAN ID must be between 1024 and
4095. It is recommended that each VLAN ID for each output
stream be unique.

VLAN VID In Use This is the actual VLAN ID in use for a specific output stream. It is
either the calculated value or the specified user value (assuming
the user value entered was valid).

99
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

CFM Opcode This is the opcode (healthy or not healthy) of the output stream.
The status of the GigE output stream is determined by the SEM
based on the overall status of the SEM and the ASI input to GigE
output status.
The CFM opcode for a stream will be healthy when:
• There are no HW alarms within the SEM
• * There are no Critical fan or temperature faults in the SEM
• * Any ASI input that has a PID, service, or stream routed to the
GigE output is Active (not Critical).

The CFM Opcode for a GigE stream will be not healthy when:
• There is a HW fault within the SEM
• * There is a Critical fan or temperature fault
• * An ASI input that is mapped to the GigE output is inactive
(Critical input failure).
• * The output stream is being removed or the SEM is about to be
rebooted.
When the SEM is about to be rebooted or the output stream is
removed, the SEM will issue 3 CFMs for each output stream with
a status of unhealthy (Lifetime field will be set to 0 to indicate the
stream is being removed).

100
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM Input/Output Configuration — Advanced

There are eight different ASI and GigE output Information Rates (Mbps)
supported by the SEM, which are user assigned in this window. The clock
column identifies the window rows 1 to 8 for each user assigned rate. The
SEM rounds-off each assigned Information Rate, which appears in the Actual
Rate column. If Default Rates is clicked, Information Rates 1–4 are assigned as
follows: 38.81, 26.97, 38.44, and 51.25; Information Rates 5–8 are set to 0.0.
The rates entered in this window are also displayed in other windows. The
output data rates in this window are not used for QAM outputs (QAM output
rate is configured from the QAM windows only). The SEM Input/Output
Configuration–Advanced window is illustrated in Figure 4-39 and defined in
Table 4-22.
Figure 4-39 SEM Input/Output Configuration — Advanced window

101
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-22 SEM Input/Output Configuration — Advanced window field definitions

Item Definition

Clock The clock column identifies the window rows 1 to 8 for each
user-assigned information rate.

Information Rate (Mbps) Information Rate in megabits per second. Zero indicates not
in use. The minimum rate is 1 Mbps and the maximum rate
is 206 Mbps for outputs. Rates cannot be set to the exact
value the user has selected. This parameter takes immediate
effect; however, it still must be applied for the change to be
permanent.

Actual Rate (Mbps) View only field that indicates the actual value implemented
by the SEM in response to the set value.

Default Rates Clicking Default Rates causes Information Rates 1-4 to be

assigned as follows: 26.97, 38.81, and 51.25; Information
Rates 4–8 are set to 0.0.

102
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

PSIP Configuration
When a SEM performs operations such as remultiplexing, PID remapping, or
MPEG service number modification on input transport streams (TS) that carry
PSIP information, then PSIP fixing is relevant. PSIP messages are not
generated by the SEM. They are extracted from input transport streams and
corrected to accurately reflect the output TS composition. PSIP insertion can
be enabled or disabled on an output transport stream basis. Message and
packet insertion periods can be configured. PSIP Fixing on GigE inputs has a
limitation of supporting EIT message extraction for a maximum of 24 services.
In contrast, ASI inputs have no such limitations. PSIP status for each mapped
service is presented through the PSIP Status column of the Output Program
Status table. The meaning of each status message is explained in Table 4-24.
The PSIP Configuration window is illustrated in Figure 4-40 and defined in Table
4-23.
Figure 4-40 PSIP Configuration window

103
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-23 PSIP Configuration window field definitions

Item Definition

Output Transport Stream Read only and reflects selections made on

other windows.

*PSIP Processing Enabled Indicates that PSIP is enabled for the output
transport stream.

*Number of EITs Per Output TS The number of Event Information Tables (EITs)
per output transport stream.

MGT Message Message insertion period in milliseconds for

the PSIP Master Guide Table (MGT). This
message is sent on the PSIP Base PID before
the start of insertion of the first packet of the
message.

STT Message Message insertion period in milliseconds for

the PSIP System Time Table (STT). This
message is sent on the PSIP Base PID before
the start of insertion of the first packet of the
message.

CVCT Message Message insertion period in milliseconds for

the PSIP Cable Virtual Channel Table (CVCT).
This message is sent on the PSIP Base PID
before the start of insertion of the first packet
of the message.

RRT Message Message insertion period in milliseconds for

the PSIP Rating Region Table (RRT). This
message is sent on the PSIP before the start
of insertion of the first packet of the message.

EIT-0 Message Insertion period in milliseconds for the PSIP

EIT messages.
EIT-1 Message
EIT-2 Message
EIT-3 Message

Base PID Packet insertion period in milliseconds for

Base PID packets. Messages sent on the PSIP
Base PID include the MGT, SST, CVCT, and
RRT. This is the minimum time between
packet insertions. The actual packet insertion
period could be delayed, depending on the
SEM processor load.

EIT-0 PID Packet insertion period in milliseconds for the

PSIP EIT messages. This is the minimum time
EIT-1 PID
between packet insertions. The actual packet
EIT-2 PID insertion period could be delayed, depending
on the SEM processor load.
EIT-3 PID

*Change requires SEM reboot.

104
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SimulCrypt Configuration
The SEM Supports SimulCrypt processing, allowing interoperability with other
Conditional Access Providers. When the SEM Device Operating Mode is
configured for Simulcrypt 1, the SEM functions as an SCS and MUX in a
SimulCrypt system. The Ethernet interface and parameters for ECMG and
EMMG connections are configured on the SimulCrypt Configuration windows.
Note: PID re-mapping must be enabled when the SEM is operating in
SimulCrypt mode.
SimulCrypt Configuration–General
This tab is used for configuring which Ethernet interface is utilized for
SimulCrypt processing and for setting the SimulCrypt Network ID. The
SimulCrypt Configuration–General window is illustrated in Figure 4-41 and
defined in Table 4-25.
Figure 4-41 SimulCrypt Configuration — General window

Table 4-25 SimulCrypt Configuration — General window field definitions

Item Definition

*Interface Indicates which host processor Ethernet interface will be used for
SimulCrypt messaging protocol. The following values are possible:
• Enet (1) – use ENET1 for SimulCrypt communications.
• Enet (2) – use ENET2 for SimulCrypt communications.
The GigE interfaces are not available for SimulCrypt.

105
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

*Network ID Specifies the network ID used for this SimulCrypt system. This is a
SimulCrypt (not an SEM) parameter.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

SimulCrypt Configuration — SCS-ECMG

This tab is used for configuring SCS client connections to external ECMG
servers. Overall SCS parameters are configured. Each SCS server can be
specified by its CAS ID, SubCAS ID, IP Address, and listening Port. The current
connection status for each SCS is displayed.
The SimulCrypt Configuration — SCS-ECMG window is illustrated in
Figure 4-42 and defined in Table 4-26.
Figure 4-42 SimulCrypt Configuration — SCS-ECMG window

Table 4-26 SimulCrypt Configuration–SCS — ECMG window field definitions

Item Definition

*Nominal Crypto Period Specifies the nominal crypto period in seconds. It is used as a
target for this device during crypto-period negotiations. The
actual negotiated crypto period may be equal to or greater
than this value.

106
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

*Access Criteria Source Specifies the currently supported source of Access Criteria.
• DAC Access Criteria – This mode enables the SEM
to utilize DAC defined Access Criteria for all
services. The DAC ensures that the Access criteria
values are unique across all services controlled by
that DAC.
• Fixed Package Access Criteria – This mode is
intended exclusively for subscription services. An
operator must define packages on the DAC, and
then assign one or more services to these
packages. This step must be done before event
queues are downloaded to a SEM. When the SEM
receives event queues, an authorization tier will
become associated with the package, creating a
three byte access criteria value. This value will
correspond to all services within this package. The
packaged services must be coordinated with the
participating CAS.

*ECMG Response Timeout Specifies how long the SCS should wait for an ECM message
response from the ECMG before moving to the next crypto
period.

*ECM ID Range Each ECM ID and Super CAS ID combination in the

SimulCrypt system must be globally unique. To simplify
configuration, each SCS is given a starting ECM ID to assign
to the first ECM stream it creates. The number is
incremented as new ECM streams are created. Each SCS
must be configured with a different value. The initial value
should be spaced sufficiently to prevent overlapping.
Recommended spacing is 196.

*Enabled Each row in the ECMG table represents a potential

SCS-ECMG connection that will be attempted during
SimulCrypt SCS initialization.
This setting controls whether or not the attempt is made:
• disabled (1) — the connection will be attempted.
• enabled (2) — the connection will not be attempted.
*CAS ID (Hex) The Super CAS ID of the ECMG that will be connected to by
the SimulCrypt SCS. The Super CAS ID is the 32-bit
concatenation of the CAS ID and the SubCAS ID. The CAS ID
identifies the conditional access provider. It supplies the
upper 16-bits of the SuperCAS ID. The SubCAS ID identifies
instances of a provider’s ECMGs on the SimulCrypt network.
It supplies the lower 16-bits of the Super CAS ID. Each
ECM ID and SuperCAS ID combination in the SimulCrypt
system must be globally unique. *SubCAS ID (Hex)

*IP Address The IP address on which the ECMG is listening. It is used to

open a socket between the SCS and the ECMG.

*Port The remote port on which the ECMG is listening. It is used to

open a socket between the SCS and the ECMG.

107
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

TCP State Specifies the TCP connection state of this SCS-ECMG

connection:
1 — open
2 — closed
3 — error

Channel State Specifies the ECMG channel state of this SCS-ECMG

connection:
1 — open
2 — closed
3 — error

*Change requires SEM reboot.

108
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SimulCrypt Configuration — EMMG-Mux

This tab is used for configuring the MUX server to accept connections from
EMMG clients. TCP and UDP ports can be specified. The current connection
status for each EMMG is displayed.
The SimulCrypt Configuration — EMMG-Mux window is illustrated in
Figure 4-43 and defined in Table 4-27.
Figure 4-43 SimulCrypt Configuration — EMMG-Mux window

Table 4-27 SimulCrypt Configuration — EMMG-Mux window field definitions

Item Definition

*TCP Port Specifies the TCP port number that the MUX
uses to determine if EMMG connections exist.

*UDP Port Specifies the UDP port number that the MUX
uses to determine if EMMG connections exist.

*Channel Test Frequency Specifies the interval in seconds at which the

channel test should be initiated by the MUX.

Max Channels Per Client Read only. This value indicates the maximum
number of channels per EMMG this device
can support.

Max Streams Per Channel Read only. This value indicates the maximum
number of streams per EMMG channel this
device can support.

109
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

*Bandwidth Per Stream Specifies the bandwidth in kbps allocated to

each connected MUX as reported in the
Stream Bandwidth Allocation message. A
value of zero causes the MUX to report the
allocated bandwidth as unknown.

EMMG Index Read only row indicator by EMMG number.

Client ID (Hex) Read only. When an EMMG connection is

made, it specifies the Client ID of the
connected EMMG.

Channel ID (Hex) Read only. When an EMMG connection is

made, it specifies the Channel ID of the
connected EMMG.

Stream Type Specifies if the streams are transferred as

sections or as transport stream packets. The
determination is made by the EMMG at
channel setup time.

Stream Count Read only. Specifies the number of streams

that have been opened by this EMMG on this
channel.

Stream Status Clicking Details invokes the SimulCrypt MUX-

EMMG Stream Status window for that EMMG
Index.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

110
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SimulCrypt Configuration — SimulCrypt MUX-EMMG Stream Status

The SimulCrypt MUX-EMMG Stream Status window is accessed from the
EMMG-Mux window by clicking Details in the Stream Status column for a
targeted MUX-EMMG Index row. The SimulCrypt MUX-EMMG Stream Status
window is illustrated in Figure 4-44 and defined in Table 4-28.
Figure 4-44 SimulCrypt MUX-EMMG Stream Status window

Table 4-28 SimulCrypt MUX — EMMG Stream Status window field definitions
Item Definition

Stream Read only row indicator by Stream number.

Stream ID (Hex) Read only. Specifies the Stream ID of the

open stream.

Data ID (Hex) Read only. Specifies the Data ID of the open

stream.

Data Type Read only. Specifies the Data Type, either

EMM or Private, of the open stream.

Insertion Count Read only. Indicates the number of packets

that have been received and inserted for this
stream.

111
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

QAM and Up Converter Configuration

The SEM QAM option generates four pairs of QAM signals or eight QAM
signals total. Each of the two QAM signals in a pair is located on adjacent
channel frequencies and are combined internal to the SEM and appear at one
of the four output F connectors. Use the QAM and Up-Converter configuration
windows to set the configuration for the eight QAM channels. The channels are
numbered 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4A and 4B. The A and B channels make up
one pair that appear at an output F-connector. In each window, the left column
controls the configuration of the A channel, which is the lower frequency
channel, and the right column controls the B channel, which is the upper
frequency channel.
The QAM/UC windows for QAM transmission modes Annex B (DCII), Annex A
(DVB), and Annex C are illustrated respectively in Figure 4-45, Figure 4-46, and
Figure 4-47. Field definitions for these windows are provided in Table 4-29.
Figure 4-45 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration — Annex B (DCII) window

112
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-46 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration — Annex A (DVB) window

113
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-47 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration — Annex C window

Table 4-29 QAM and Up-Converter Configuration windows field definitions

Item Definition

*QAM Transmission Mode Select the QAM transmission mode based on the type of
digital cable system. North American systems typically
operate in Annex B (DCII) mode. European systems
typically operate in Annex A (DVB) mode. The SEM can
also operate in Annex C (Asia-Pacific) mode. The selected
mode applies to all eight QAM channels.

Status LED Indicates the highest QAM or upconverter fault condition

associated with this output. The alarm indications are as
follows:
• Green – no alarm.
• Gray – cause of alarm is indeterminate.
• Yellow – warning.
• Blue – minor.
• Magenta – major.
• Red – critical.
If an LED alarm indication is active, look at “Modulator
Status” and “Up-Converter Status” and/or display the
Alarm and Events window to determine if a QAM Fault or
Upconverter Fault is the cause.

114
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Output Transport Stream No. This parameter appears before the QAM designator (for
(TSID) example, 9:QAM1A) if there is a transport stream;
otherwise, nothing appears and the QAM channel is
graytone. The number of the output transport stream is
routed to this port. Zero indicates that no stream is routed
to this port. It serves as the index into the Transport
Stream Configuration Table.

Modulation Mode 64 QAM or 256 QAM

Symbol Rate (Msps) In Annex A (DVB) mode, the user can select the symbol
rate. Typical values for 8 MHz channels will be 6.9, 6.95, or
6.952 Msps. The selected symbol rate must not cause the
bandwidth of the resulting QAM signal to exceed the
channel spacing. A channel spacing of 8 MHz can support
a symbol rate of up to 6.952 Msps.
In Annex B (DCII) mode, the symbol rates are fixed for
either 64 or 256 QAM and cannot be changed.
In Annex C mode, the user can select the symbol rate.
Typical values for 6 MHz channels will be 5.31 Msps. The
selected symbol rate must not cause the bandwidth of the
resulting QAM signal to exceed the channel spacing. A
channel spacing of 6 MHz can support a symbol rate of up
to 5.31 Msps.

Information Rate (Mbps) The information rate is displayed based upon the selected
symbol rate and Modulation mode. The information rate
cannot be changed directly. This is the information payload
rate.

Mute Each channel can be turned off or muted. For normal

operation, select Un-Muted to activate the channel. The
mute setting is intended to be used for turning off a
channel for short periods of time. If the channel will no
longer be used, the Output Transport Stream should be
disabled on the Output Transport Stream Configuration
window.

Interleave Depth For Annex A (DVB) mode, Annex C mode, and for Annex B
(DCII) 64 QAM mode, the interleaver is fixed at a standard
setting and cannot be changed.
Annex B (DCII) 256 QAM mode allows for variable
interleaver settings. The standard value for Annex B (DCII)
256 QAM mode is I=128, J=4. If you select a non-standard
value, be sure that all the set-tops in your system are
compatible with the non-standard value.

Spectral Inversion Select Normal for normal operation. Select Invert for
troubleshooting non-standard systems.

115
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Test Mode Select Off for normal operation. The CW test mode
provides a CW carrier with the same average power as the
QAM signal. This is useful for setting the output level using
a spectrum analyzer, as it avoids the need to use
bandwidth correction factors. The PRBS test modes
generate standard Pseudo Random Bit Streams with or
without inserting the MPEG sync byte. These are used for
BER testing.

Channel Spacing (MHz) (DVB In Annex A (DVB) mode, spacing between the A and B
only) channel center frequencies can be configured. Most DVB
systems typically use a channel spacing of 8 MHz. The
selected symbol rate must not cause the bandwidth of the
resulting QAM signal to exceed the channel spacing. A
channel spacing of 8 MHz can support a symbol rate of up
to 6.952 Msps.
In Annex B (DCII) and Annex C mode, the channel spacing
is fixed and cannot be changed.

EIA Channel (DCII only) Selecting the HRC or STD button adjacent to EIA Channel
allows tuning based on EIA channel by entering the desired
EIA channel number for channel A. When STD is selected,
the SEM standard EIA channels with channel spacing of
6 MHz are used. When HRC is selected, the SEM HRC EIA
channels with channel spacing of 6.0003 MHz are used.
Selecting the HRC or STD button adjacent to RF Output
Frequency deactivates channel tuning.
After applying the data, the matching EIA channel
frequencies will be displayed in the RF Output Frequency
boxes.

RF Output Frequency (Hz) Selecting the HRC or STD button adjacent to RF Output
Frequency allows tuning based on frequency by entering
the desired frequency for channel A. When STD is selected
the SEM, will use standard EIA channel spacing of 6 MHz.
When HRC is selected the SEM, will use HRC EIA channel
spacing of 6.0003 MHz.
Selecting the HRC or STD button adjacent to EIA Channel
deactivates frequency tuning.
After applying the data, the matching EIA channel numbers
will be displayed in the EIA Channel boxes, with N/A being
displayed if the frequencies do not match an EIA Channel
frequency.

RF Output Level (dBmV) Select the desired RF output level for each channel.
For QAM board MCNs less than 50, optimum
signal-to-noise performance will be obtained using output
levels in the range of +45 to +56 dBmV.
For QAM board MCNs 50 and greater, optimum
signal-to-noise performance will be obtained using output
levels in the range of +45 to +61 dBmV.

116
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Modulator Status No error indicates the QAM modulator is functioning

normally.
Normal indicates that the QAM modulator is functioning
normally.
These errors indicate a possible problem in the QAM
modulator:
• Comm Error – indicates there is a control
communications error with the QAM modulator.
• Clock PLL Error – indicates the PLL error on the QAM
card.
• FEC Sync Error – indicates the FEC encoder is unable to
detect the MPEG sync bytes.
• Scaler Error – indicates an overflow condition in the
QAM modulator.
• FIFO Error – indicates an underflow or overflow error of
the symbol FIFO.
Modulator Revision Indicates the revision status of the modulator hardware.

Upconverter (1-4) Status The following displayed status information regarding the
upconverter applies to both the A and B channels:
• Normal indicates that the up-converter is functioning
normally.
• These errors indicate a possible problem in the
up-converter or QAM modulator:
• Comm error indicates there is a control communications
error with the up-converter.
• Synth error indicates a synthesizer is out of lock.
• RF Low error indicates the measured RF output level is
lower than expected.
• RF High error indicates the measured RF output level is
higher than expected.
Warning: False RF Low or RF High errors can be caused by
unterminated RF outputs. All unused RF outputs should be
terminated or muted to prevent false RF Low or RF High
errors.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

117
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Output Transport Stream Configuration

The Output Transport Stream Configuration window is applicable for all
operating modes: Cable Encryptor, Manual Routing, UDP Mapping, ASI
Demultiplexing, and Eight Channel UDP Mapping.
Output Transport Stream Configuration — Cable Encryptor (or SimulCrypt)
In Cable Encryption mode, the Output Transport Stream Configuration window
is applicable to broadcast systems where the DAC 6000 is the controller. This
window provides the capability to assign a number of programs per output
transport stream to each ACP, associate an output transport stream index
number to a specific SEM output interface port, and select an information rate
for that interface. The available drop-down list information rates are set by the
user on the Input/Output Configuration-Advanced window. The Output
Transport Stream Configuration–Cable Encryption window is illustrated in
Figure 4-48 and defined in Table 4-30.
Figure 4-48 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Cable Encryption (or SimulCrypt)
window

118
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-30 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Cable Encryption (or SimulCrypt)
window field definitions
Item Definition

ASI Monitor Port Number When enabled (check mark), it indicates the number of the
transport stream to route to the ASI Monitor Port on the
front panel. Zero indicates that no stream is to be routed to
the ASI Monitor Port. This parameter takes immediate effect.

*Output Transport Stream The output modes are:

Speed Mode
• * High — ASI 5-8, GigE 1-3, or a mix of these for four
outputs. Maximum output rate is 206 Mbps without
encryption and 160 Mbps with encryption.
• * Low — All 16 outputs. Maximum output rate is 53 Mbps,
encrypted or unencrypted.
Utilization Monitoring Invokes the Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring
window, which is illustrated in Figure 4-54.

Transport Stream Index Output transport stream number.

*Output Interface Selection The number and type of output this transport stream is to be
routed. The settings are limited to the following:
GigE 1 3 for any stream 1—16.
ASI 5-8: only to streams 1 through 4 respectively.
QAM 1A-4B: only to streams 9 through 16 respectively.

Information Rate (Mbps) Rate in Mbps. Zero indicates not in use. The minimum rate is
1 Mbps and the maximum rate is 206 Mbps. SEM rates
cannot be set to the exact value the user has selected. This
parameter takes immediate effect. This field is view only for
QAM, as QAM rates are configured in the applicable
Annex QAM and Up Converter Configuration window.

*GigE Tx Multicast Interface Identifies the specific GigE 1-3 used as the output for
multicast streams. When a GigE output stream’s destination
IP address is a multicast IP address, this setting defines the
physical GigE interface that will be used. Singlecast and
broadcast GigE outputs use the network stack’s routing table
(based on destination IP address) and the user-defined static
routing table to determine which physical GigE interface to
use.

*Number Encrypted Program Sets the number of programs per output transport stream to
Supported be encrypted by each ACP. The ACP module can encrypt 128
programs.
This field is applicable only if an ACP module is installed and
the SEM is externally controlled.
The number of encrypted programs per output stream must
be either 0 or multiples of 8 (0, 8, 16, 24, 32 . . . 128).

*Change requires SEM reboot.

119
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Output Transport Stream Configuration — Manual Routing

The Output Transport Stream Configuration — Manual Routing mode window
is applicable to broadcast systems where the SEM-EM is used as a surrogate
controller. It provides the capability to manually associate an output transport
stream index number to a specific SEM output interface, clock rate, and PAT
output transport stream ID. For the GigE interfaces, the output IP address and
output UDP port can also be specified. The Output Transport Stream
Configuration — Manual Routing window is illustrated in Figure 4-49 and
defined in Table 4-31.
Figure 4-49 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Manual Routing window

120
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-31 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Manual Routing window field
definitions
Item Definition

ASI Monitor Port Transport Stream When enabled (check mark), it indicates the
Number number of the transport stream to route to the
ASI Monitor Port on the front panel. Zero
indicates that no stream is to be routed to the
ASI Monitor Port. This parameter takes
immediate effect.

Output Transport Stream Speed Mode The output modes are:

• High – ASI 5–8, GigE 1–3, or a mix of these
for four outputs. Maximum output rate is
206 Mbps without encryption and 160 Mbps
with encryption.
• Low – All 16 outputs. Maximum output rate
is 53 Mbps, encrypted or unencrypted.
Utilization Monitoring Invokes the Output Transport Stream
Utilization Monitoring window, which is
illustrated in Figure 4-54.

Transport Stream Index Output transport stream number.

*Output Interface Selection The number and type of output this transport
stream is to be routed. The settings are limited
to the following:
• GigE 1–3 for any stream 1–16.
• ASI 5–8: only to streams 1 through 4
respectively.
• QAM 1A–4B: only to streams 9 through 16
respectively.
Information Rate (Mbps) Rate for clock in megabits per second. Zero
indicates clock not in use. The minimum rate
is 1 Mbps, and the maximum rate is 206
Mbps. SEM clocks cannot be set to the exact
value the user has selected. This parameter
takes immediate effect.

PAT Output TSID The output transport stream ID to use for the
output PAT in this output transport stream.
This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this parameter will result in all
programs on the output stream(s) being
changed to be deleted and re-added. This will
result in a momentary glitch.

*GigE Tx Multicast Interface Identifies the specific GigE 1–3 used as the
output. When a GigE output stream’s
destination IP address is a multicast IP
address, this setting defines the physical GigE
interface that will be used. Singlecast and
broadcast GigE outputs use the network
stack’s routing table (based on destination IP
address) and the user-defined static.

121
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Output IP Address Only applicable to GigE ports. The output IP

address for this output transport stream. The
Output IP address must be a valid class A, B,
C, or D address. Additionally, the output IP
address and UDP port for each GigE output
must be unique for each output stream. The
same output IP address can be used for
multiple GigE outputs, but each output stream
must then have a unique UDP port.
This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this parameter will result in all
programs on the output stream(s) being
changed to be deleted and re-added. This will
result in a momentary glitch.

Output UDP Port Only applicable to GigE ports. The output UDP
port for this output transport stream. The
output UDP port must be from 0 – 65535. This
parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this parameter will result in all
programs on the output stream(s) being
changed to be deleted and re-added. This will
result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

*Number Encrypted Program Supported Sets the number of programs per output
transport stream to be encrypted by each
ACP. The ACP module can encrypt 128
programs.
This field is applicable only if an ACP module is
installed and the SEM is externally controlled.
The number of encrypted programs per output
stream must be either 0 or multiples of 8 (0, 8,
16, 24, 32 . . . 128).
In this operating mode, the number of
encrypted programs per output is only relevant
when CTE is Enabled.

Available Indicates the remaining number of encrypted

programs supported that are available.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

122
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Output Transport Stream Configuration — UDP Mapping

The Output Transport Stream Configuration — UDP Mapping mode window is
applicable to VOD systems where the SEM-EM is mapped from a VOD
controller. It provides the capability to associate an output transport stream
index number to a specific SEM output interface and information clock rate.
The Output Transport Stream Configuration — UDP Mapping window is
illustrated in Figure 4-50 and defined in Table 4-32.
Figure 4-50 Output Transport Stream Configuration — UDP Mapping window

Table 4-32 Output Transport Stream Configuration — UDP Mapping window field
definitions
Item Definition

ASI Monitor Port Transport Stream When enabled (check mark), it indicates the
Number number of the transport stream to route to the
ASI Monitor Port on the front panel. Zero
indicates that no stream is to be routed to the
ASI Monitor Port. This parameter takes
immediate effect.

Output Transport Stream Speed Mode The output modes are:

• High — ASI 5–8, GigE 1–3, or a mix of these
for four outputs. Maximum output rate is
206 Mbps without encryption and 160 Mbps
with encryption.
• Low — All 16 outputs. Maximum output
rate is 53 Mbps, encrypted or unencrypted.

123
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Utilization Monitoring Invokes the Output Transport Stream

Utilization Monitoring window, which is
illustrated in Figure 4-54.

Transport Stream Index Output transport stream number.

*Output Interface Selection The number and type of output this transport
stream is to be routed. The settings are limited
to the following:
• GigE 1–3: for any stream 1–16.
• ASI 5–8: only to streams 1 through 4
respectively.
• QAM 1A–4B: only to streams 9 through 16
respectively.
Information Rate (Mbps) Rate for clock in megabits per second. Zero
indicates clock not in use. The minimum rate
is 1 Mbps, and the maximum rate is 206
Mbps. SEM clocks cannot be set to the exact
value the user has selected. This parameter
takes immediate effect.

*Number Encrypted Program Supported Enables selection of the number of programs

that can be encrypted on an output stream.
Only multiples of ACP services per encryption
processor are valid, and the combined
encryption count cannot exceed the ACP
modules capacity (for example, 128). This field
is applicable only if an ACP module is installed.
The number of encrypted programs per output
stream must be either 0 or multiples of 8 (0, 8,
16, 24, 32 . . . 128).
In this operating mode, the number of
encrypted programs per output is only relevant
when CTE is Enabled.

Available Indicates the remaining number of encrypted

programs supported that are available.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

124
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Output Transport Stream Configuration — ASI Demultiplexing

The Output Transport Stream Configuration — ASI Demultiplexing window is
used to configure ASI inputs to GigE and/or QAM outputs whereby starting
and ending program service ranges are defined for outputs associated to
specific ASI inputs. It is a quicker alternative than using Manual Remapping,
which entails defining each service output individually. The Output Transport
Stream Configuration — ASI Demultiplexing window is illustrated in Figure 4-51
and defined in Table 4-33.
Figure 4-51 Output Transport Stream Configuration — ASI Demultiplexing window

125
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-33 Output Transport Stream Configuration — ASI Demultiplexing window field
definitions
Item Definition

ASI Monitor Port Transport Stream When enabled (check mark), it indicates the number
Number of the transport stream to route to the ASI Monitor
Port on the front panel. Zero indicates that no
stream is to be routed to the ASI Monitor Port. This
parameter takes immediate effect.

Output Transport Stream Speed Mode The output modes are:

• High — ASI 5–8, GigE 1–3, or a mix of these for
four outputs. Maximum output rate is 206 Mbps
without encryption and 160 Mbps with
encryption.
• Low — All 16 outputs. Maximum output rate is
53 Mbps, encrypted or unencrypted.
Utilization Monitoring Invokes the Output Transport Stream Utilization
Monitoring window, which is illustrated in
Figure 4-54.

Transport Stream Index Output transport stream number.

*Output Interface Selection The number and type of output this transport
stream is to be routed. The settings are limited to
the following:
• GigE 1–3 for any stream 1–16.
• ASI 5–8: only to streams 1 through 4 respectively.
• QAM 1A–4B: only to streams 9 through 16
respectively.
Information Rate (Mbps) Rate for clock in megabits per second. Zero
indicates clock not in use. The minimum rate is
1 Mbps, and the maximum rate is 206 Mbps. SEM
clocks cannot be set to the exact value the user has
selected. This parameter takes immediate effect.

*Number Encrypted Program Supported Enables selection of the number of programs that
can be encrypted on an output stream. Only
multiples of ACP services per encryption processor
are valid, and the combined encryption count cannot
exceed the ACP modules capacity (for example,
128). This field is applicable only if an ACP module
is installed.
The number of encrypted programs per output
stream must be either 0 or multiples of 8 (0, 8, 16,
24, 32 . . . 128).
In this operating mode, the number of encrypted
programs per output is only relevant when CTE is
Enabled

Available Indicates the remaining number of encrypted

programs supported that are available.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

126
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Output Transport Stream Configuration — Standardized UDP Port Mapping

The Output Transport Stream Configuration — Standardized UDP Port Mapping
mode window is applicable to VOD systems where encryption is not required.
It provides the capability to associate an output transport stream index number
to a specific SEM output interface and information clock rate. The Output
Transport Stream Configuration — Standardized UDP Port Mapping window is
illustrated in Figure 4-52 and defined in Table 4-34.
Figure 4-52 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Standardized UDP Port Mapping
mode window

127
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-34 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Standardized UDP Port Mapping
mode window field definitions
Item Definition

ASI Monitor Port Transport Stream When enabled (check mark), it indicates the
Number number of the transport stream to route to the
ASI Monitor Port on the front panel. Zero
indicates that no stream is to be routed to the
ASI Monitor Port. This parameter takes
immediate effect.

Output Transport Stream Speed Mode The output modes are:

• High — ASI 5-8, GigE 1-3, or a mix of these
for four outputs. Maximum output rate is
206 Mbps without encryption and 160 Mbps
with encryption.
• Low — All 16 outputs. Maximum output
rate is 53 Mbps, encrypted or unencrypted.
Utilization Monitoring Invokes the Output Transport Stream
Utilization Monitoring window, which is
illustrated in Figure 4-54.

Transport Stream Index Output transport stream number.

*Output Interface Selection The number and type of output this transport
stream is to be routed. The settings are limited
to the following:
• GigE 1–3 for any stream 1–16.
• ASI 5–8: only to streams 1 through 4
respectively.
• QAM 1A–4B: only to streams 9 through 16
respectively.
Information Rate (Mbps) Rate for clock in megabits per second. Zero
indicates clock not in use. The minimum rate
is 1 Mbps, and the maximum rate is 53 Mbps.
SEM clocks cannot be set to the exact value
the user has selected. This parameter takes
immediate effect. This field is view only for
QAM, as QAM rates are configured in the
applicable annex QAM and Up Converter
Configuration window.

*Number Encrypted Program Supported Enables selection of the number of programs

that can be encrypted on an output stream.
The number of encrypted programs per output
stream must be either 0 or multiples of 8
(0,8,16,24,32 . . . 128).
In this operating mode, the number of
encrypted programs per output is only relevant
when CTE is Enabled.

Available Indicates the remaining number of encrypted

programs supported that are available.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

128
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Output Transport Stream Configuration — Eight Channel UDP Mapping

The Output Transport Stream Configuration — Eight Channel UDP window is
used to map QAM1A through 4B outputs to emulate outputs of non-Motorola
edge devices. The Output Transport Stream Configuration — Eight Channel
UDP Mapping window is illustrated in Figure 4-53 and defined in Table 4-35.
Figure 4-53 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Eight Channel UDP Mapping
window

129
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-35 Output Transport Stream Configuration — Eight Channel UDP Mapping
window field definitions
Item Definition

ASI Monitor Port Transport Stream When enabled (check mark), it indicates the
Number number of the transport stream to route to the
ASI Monitor Port on the front panel. Zero
indicates that no stream is to be routed to the
ASI Monitor Port. This parameter takes
immediate effect.

Utilization Monitoring Invokes the Output Transport Stream

Utilization Monitoring window, which is
illustrated in Figure 4-54.

Transport Stream Index Output transport stream number.

*Output Interface Selection The number and type of output routing for this
transport stream. The routes are QAM 1A–4B
to streams 9 through 16 respectively.

Information Rate (Mbps) Rate for clock in megabits per second. Zero
indicates clock not in use. The minimum rate
is 1 Mbps, and the maximum rate is 206
Mbps. SEM clocks cannot be set to the exact
value the user has selected. This parameter
takes immediate effect.

*Number Encrypted Program Supported Enables selection of the number of programs

that can be encrypted on an output stream.
Only multiples of ACP services per encryption
processor are valid and the combined
encryption count cannot exceed the ACP
modules capacity (for example, 128). This field
is applicable only if an ACP module is installed.
The number of encrypted programs per output
stream must be either 0 or multiples of 8 (0, 8,
16, 24, 32 . . . 128).
In this operating mode, the number of
encrypted programs per output is only relevant
when CTE is Enabled.

Available Indicates the remaining number of encrypted

programs supported that are available.

*Change requires SEM reboot.

130
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring

The Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring window provides a data
rate summary presentation within a sampled time-frame. The user can enable
and disable monitoring of one or all output transport streams. Each monitored
output transport stream is monitored for one second to determine the output
data rate. Each transport stream is monitored for one full second; therefore,
when all 16 streams are being monitored, the data rate for any transport
stream is updated every 16 seconds. Conversely, if only one transport stream
is being monitored, its output data rate is updated every second. The Output
Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring window is illustrated in Figure 4-54 and
defined in Table 4-36.
Figure 4-54 Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring window

131
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-36 Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring window field definitions
Item Definition

Output Transport Stream The transport stream number associated to an

output interface port.

Output Stream Status Summary of the possible alarms associated

with an output stream, such as:
• Output Stream Overflow
• Output Stream Threshold
• Output Stream Host IP Overflow
• QAM Fault
• Upconverter Fault
The highest current fault is indicated by each
LED. The alarm indications are as follows:
• Green — no alarm.
• Gray — cause of alarm is indeterminate.
• Yellow — warning.
• Blue — minor.
• Magenta — major.
• Red — critical.
If an LED alarm indication is active, display the
Alarm and Events window to determine which
of the above output transport stream alarms is
the cause.

Output Overflow Status This LED is red if an overflow error occurred at

least once during this sampling interval. When
green, it indicates no output overflow error
occurred.
An output overflow indicates that the input
stream data rate is either greater than the
output stream data rate, or the input stream
has had a sudden burst (a sudden increase in
the input data rate). Input streams that are
prone to sudden bursts can cause the SEM to
overflow and will result in the dropping of
output packets.

Output Threshold Status This LED is red if a threshold reached error

occurred at least once during this sampling
interval. When green, it indicates no threshold
reached error occurred.

Enable Monitoring Enables Monitoring when active (check mark).

Data Rate (Mbps)–Current Current data rate of most recently taken

sample (1 –— seconds depending on number
of streams being monitored).

Data Rate (Mbps) — Average Average utilization over this sampling interval
in bps.
This is the average data rate over the last 15
minutes (sampling interval is a sliding 15
minute interval).

132
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Data Rate (Mbps)–Peak Peak utilization for a sample during this

sampling interval in bps.
This is the peak data rate over the last 15
minutes (sampling interval is a sliding 15
minute interval).

Data Rate (Mbps)–Minimum Minimum utilization for a sample during this

sampling interval in bps.
This is the minimum data rate over the last 15
minutes (sampling interval is a sliding 15
minute interval).

Time Recorded Time in GPS seconds that this table row was
saved. When GPS time is not available to the
SEM, the internal SEM clock is used. This
clock starts at GPS time zero when the SEM is
booted. The SEM uses real GPS time when
available.
Note that when the SEM time source is
internal (no GPS time source available), the
user can select PC time from the System
Configuration window to allow the SEM to use
the current PC time of the SEM-EM for logging
purposes.

Alarm Threshold (%) This threshold, which is a percent of usable

bandwidth, monitors output transport stream
bandwidth utilization and produces an alarm
for the following conditions:
• Minor alarm — if the threshold is met or
exceeded for the time specified in Alarm Set
Delay. The minor alarm clears after
remaining below the threshold for the time
specified in Alarm Clear Delay. Setting Alarm
threshold to 0 or 100 disables the minor
alarm.
• Critical alarm — if the rate reaches 100%
(overflow). The alarm returns to minor if the
level is no longer at overflow but above the
threshold for the time specified in Alarm
Clear Delay. The critical alarm can not be
disabled, even if the Alarm Threshold is set
at 0 or 100.
This parameter takes immediate effect.

Alarm Set Delay (seconds) This is the time in seconds the output
transport stream bandwidth utilization exceeds
the Alarm Threshold percentage before
alarming. This parameter takes immediate
effect.

133
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Alarm Clear Delay (seconds) This is the time in seconds that output
transport stream bandwidth utilization must
remain below the Alarm Threshold percentage
before clearing the alarm. This parameter
takes immediate effect.

134
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

VOD Control
Clicking VOD Control on the SEM-EM menu bar displays the drop-down list, as
illustrated in Figure 4-55.
Figure 4-55 VOD control drop-down list

The VOD Control screen-sets described in the subsections that follow are:
SEM VOD Control
• Manual Remapping
• UDP Mapping
• ASI Demultiplexing Configuration
• 8-Channel UDP Mapping
• Standardized UDP Mapping
• Ancillary PID Routing

135
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM VOD Control — Manual Routing

The SEM VOD Control — Manual Routing window provides the capability to
manually map services or an entire transport stream from input to designated
output interfaces.
Clicking Enable Manual Routing on (check mark) activates the lower panel of
the display to manually input parameter selections for each route. All selections
appear in the window display panel. Leaving Enable Manual Routing inactive
(hollow) disables the lower panel, which appears blank. The SEM VOD Control–
Manual Remapping window is illustrated in Figure 4-56 and defined in
Table 4-37.
Figure 4-56 SEM VOD Control — Manual Routing window

136
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-37 SEM VOD Control — Manual Routing window field definitions
Item Definition
Index Identifies the window line item.
Enabled Check mark indicates route is enabled.
PassThru Check mark indicates Transport Stream PassThru is enabled. Indicates that
an entire input transport stream is passed through to a specific output.
Pre-Encrypted Check mark indicates the input service may be pre-encrypted. Only available
when routing an individual service (PassThru disabled). This informs the SEM
to check each input service for a GI CA ECM descriptor (in the PMT). Any
input service that contains a PMT with a GI CA ECM descriptor is considered
to be pre-encrypted. The SEM will process the service as normal, but will
also pass through the ECM PID.
The SEM can only support pre-encrypted services when the ECM and PMT
PIDs are on separate input PIDs.
Input Interface Specifies an ASI, ENET, or GigE port as the input interface.
Input UDP Port When GigE 1-3 or ENET1-2 is the Input Interface, it specifies the input UDP
port number for the transport stream.
The input UDP Ports must be in the following range:
ENET1 – 2 UDP Ports: 1024 – 65535
GigE UDP Ports: 0 – 65535
Input Program Identifies the input MPEG program number for the transport stream (0 —
No. 65535). Input Program No. 0 is used as a “wild card” program. This informs
the SEM to map the first service listed in the input PAT message to the
specified output. When mapping a program in this manner, only one service
mapping from that specific input to an output can be performed
Output Identifies the output MPEG program number for the transport stream
Program No. (1-65535).
Output Stream Specifies the output transport stream number and the output interface port.
Output IP For GigE outputs, the Output IP address of the output transport stream. The
Address Output IP Address is defined on the Output Transport Stream Configuration
window.
Output UDP For GigE outputs, the output UDP port of the output transport stream. The
Port Output UDP Port is defined on the Output Transport Stream Configuration
window.
Output The frequency in Hz of the output stream (applies only to QAM output
Frequency streams). The Output Frequency is defined on the QAM Configuration
window.

137
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition
Enable Manual When enabled (check mark), the lower panel displays for manual input of
Routing parameters, as determined by the value entered into Index for the targeted
line to be edited. The parameters that can be modified on a selected index
line using the Enable Manual Routing fields are as follows:
Index Line Enable Manual Routing Field
Index Index — indicates the highlighted index line
in the upper window panel.
Input Interface Input Interface Selection — can be ASI,
GigE 1-3 or ENET1-2.
Input UDP Port Input UDP Port — appears only if Input
Interface Selection is GigE 1-3 or ENET1-2.
Output Stream Output Transport Stream — can be QAM,
GigE 1-3, or ENET1-2.
Output UDP Port Output UDP Port — appears only if Output
Transport Stream is GigE 1-3, or ENET1-2.
Output IP Address Output IP Address — appears only if Output
Transport Stream is GigE 1-3, or ENET1-2.
Output Frequency Output Frequency — appears only if Output
Transport Stream is QAM.
Input Program No. Input MPEG Program Number
Output Program No. Output MPEG Program Number
Pre-Encrypted Input Program Pre-Encrypted
PassThru Transport Stream Passthrough
Transport When enabled (check mark), the entire input transport stream is passed to
Stream the specified output transport stream. The Input MPEG Program Number,
Passthrough Output MPEG Program Number, and Input Program Pre-Encrypted fields are
not available in the lower window panel when Transport Stream Passthrough
is active.
When an input stream is passed through to an output stream, all PIDs are
passed through to the output. The SEM cannot perform insertion or
encryption on the output stream.
Input Program When enabled (checkmark), it indicates that the input stream may be
Pre-Encrypted encrypted. When a program is mapped, the SEM will determine if the input
program is encrypted (based on ECM PID reference in the PMT). If the
program is encrypted (PMT contains a GI CA ECM descriptor), the SEM will
map the input ECM PID and extract and re-insert the PIT message, in
addition to remapping the program component PIDs. Enabling pre-encryption
has no effect on programs that are clear (not encrypted).
For the SEM to properly process a pre-encrypted program, the ECM PID
must be on a different PID than the PMT PID.
Show Status Provides drop-list selections to:
• SEM PSI Table (Figure 4-76).
• Output Program Status Table (Figure 4-72 and Figure 4-73).
• Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring (Figure 4-54).

138
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Manual Routing Mapping Restrictions

In the bulleted list below, the SEM identifies a GigE input transport stream
based on the physical GigE interface and receive UDP Port. The following
restrictions apply to the routing of programs and transport streams:
• A GigE input program from a specific input transport stream can only be
mapped to one output. This means that a program received on a UDP port
on a specific GigE interface cannot be mapped to multiple outputs.
• A GigE input transport stream can only be passed through to one output.
This means that an input transport stream received on a UDP port on a
specific GigE interface cannot be passed through to multiple outputs.
• If a GigE input stream is being passed through to an output stream, no
programs on that input can be mapped to an output.
• If a GigE input program is being mapped as a wild card (input program
number 0), no other programs from that input stream can be mapped to
the same output stream.
• If a program is pre-encrypted (and the pre-encrypted check box is selected),
the input ECM PID and input PMT PID must be on different PIDs.

Example of Manually Configuring the SEM-EM for Remultiplexing

In the example SEM-EM setup procedure that follows, input ports ASI-1 and
ASI-2 are configured to output ports QAM-1A and QAM-1B respectively. The
example that follows also assumes a North American operating system.
1. Invoke the system browser and type the <SEM IP address> in the URL
address field; the addressed SEM home page is displayed.
2. Click the hyperlink to download the SEM-EM application; the file download
pop-up is displayed.
3. Click Save this file to Disk and click OK.
4. After the application downloads, either double-click the downloaded
semem.jar (recommended) or access MS-DOS. At the command line type:
java –jar semem.jar and press ENTER.
(type java^-jar^semem.jar where ^ means press spacebar)
The SEM Element Manager Login window is displayed.
5. Type the <User name>, <password>, and <SEM IP address> and click OK; the
SEM-EM Main window appears for the targeted SEM.
6. On the Menu bar, click Configuration and select SEM System Configuration
from the drop-down list. The SEM System Configuration window is
displayed.
• In the SEM Device Operating Mode field, select Manual Routing.

139
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

• Click the System Time tab. SEM System Time will be graytone; however,
the System Up Time and Time Source fields will be active.
• Click the Ethernet tab.
• Type the <Host Default Gateway Address>.
• The Enet1 OAMP MAC Address appears in the MAC Address field. Type
the <IP address> assigned to this port.
• Type the applicable <Subnet Mask>.
• Click the Advanced tab; ensure the two check box fields are disabled
(hollow), as there is no encryption in manual routing. In Total PIDs Per
Program, select 64.
• Click Apply.
7. On the Menu bar, click Configuration and select SEM Input/Output
Configuration from the drop-down list. The SEM Input/Output Configuration
window is displayed.
• Click the ASI Ports tab. For ASI-1 and ASI-2, select Enabled as Input. Ensure
ASI-3 through ASI-8 are Disabled.
• Click the Gigabit Ethernet tab and ensure that the IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and Default Gateway are all 0.0.0.0 for GigE-1 through GigE-3.
Also, GigE-1 through GigE-3 should be Disabled.
• Click the Advanced tab and click Default Rates. Values 38.81, 26.97,
38.44, and 51.25 appear for Index-1 through Index-4 respectively.
• Click Apply.
8. On the Menu bar, click Configuration and select QAM and Up Converter
Configuration from the drop-down list. The QAM and Up-Converter
Configuration window is displayed.
• In the QAM Transmission Mode field, select Annex B (DCII) from the
drop-down list.
• For the QAM1A-1B tab, typical settings are (bold items are alterable):
Parameter QAM1A QAM1B
Modulation Mode 64 QAM 256 QAM
Symbol Rate (Msps) 5.056941 5.360537
Information Rate (Mbps) 26.97 38.81
Mute Un-Muted Un-Muted
Interleave Depth I = 128, J = 1 I = 128, J =
4
Spectral Inversion Normal Normal
Test Mode Off Off

140
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

*EIA Channel 100 101

*RF Output Frequency (Hz) 651000000 657000000
RF Output Level (dBmV) 56.00 56.00
Modulator Status Normal Normal
Modulator Revision 1 1
Output Transport Stream 9 10
No.
Up-Converter 1 Status Normal Normal
Temperature (Celsius) 50 50
*EIA Channel or RF Output Frequency (Hz) are alterable, but not both.
• Click Apply.
9. On the Menu bar, click Configuration and select Output Transport Stream
Configuration from the drop-down list. The SEM Output Transport Stream
Configuration–Manual Routing window is displayed.
• For Transport Stream Index 9, select QAM-1A and type 1 for the
PAT TS ID. For 64 QAM, the value 26.97 appears in the Information Rate
(Mbps) field.
• For Transport Stream Index 10, select QAM-1B and type 2 for the PAT TS
ID. For 256 QAM, the value 38.81 appears in the Information Rate
(Mbps) field.
• Click Apply.
10. On the Menu bar, click VOD Control and select Manual Remapping from the
drop-down list. The SEM VOD Control–Manual Routing Configuration
window is displayed.
• Enable Manual Routing (check mark).
• Highlight Index 0001.
• For Input Interface Selection, select ASI-1 from the drop-down list.
• For Output Transport Stream, select 09:QAM1A from the drop-down list.
• Enable (check mark) Transport Stream Passthrough.
• Highlight Index 0002.
• For Input Interface Selection, select ASI-2 from the drop-down list.
• For Output Transport Stream, select 10:QAM1B from the drop-down list.
• Enable (check mark) Transport Stream Passthrough.
• Click Apply.
11. Reboot the SEM.

141
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping

The SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping window provides the capability to
specify the starting and ending program number range and the transport
stream identification used by the PAT for each transport stream that was
associated to an interface output in the SEM Output Transport Stream
Configuration window. Destination IP addresses and UDP port numbers are
also defined for GigE 1-3 ports. The SEM VOD Control–UDP Mapping window
is illustrated in Figure 4-57 and defined in Table 4-38.
Figure 4-57 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping window

142
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-38 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping window field definitions
Item Definition

Input Program Pre-Encrypted When active (check mark), it indicates

pre-encrypted programs can be processed through
the SEM. Changing this setting will cause all
programs already mapped to be deleted and re-
added. This will result in a momentary glitch in the
video stream.

Input Port Input port of the UDP algorithm from the VOD
controller. Changing this setting will cause all
programs already mapped to be deleted and re-
added. This will result in a momentary glitch in the
video stream.

Base Offset for Opening Input UDP Identifies the start of the defined range beyond the
Ports IANA reserved range for the input UDP ports when
using UDP mapping of the SEM-EM.
Offset values are:
• 0
• 8192
• 16384
• 24576
• 32768
• 40960
• 49152
• 57344
Changing this setting will cause all programs
already mapped to be deleted and re-added. This
will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

Output Transport Stream This column replicates the selections made for the
output interfaces on the SEM Output Transport
Stream Configuration window. GigE interface ports
are not specified. It is view only.

Starting Program Number Used in conjunction with Number Programs to

indicate a range of programs. This is the starting
program number of the first program on an output.
Changing this setting will cause all programs
already mapped to be deleted and re-added. This
will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

143
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Number Programs Used in conjunction with Starting Program Number

to indicate a range of programs. The maximum
number of programs is based on the configuration
of the Output Transport Stream (based on the PID
Remapping setting) The default is 64 programs per
output stream; however, this can be increased to
252 programs per output.
Changing this setting will cause all programs
already mapped to be deleted and re-added. This
will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

PAT TS ID The output transport stream ID to use for the

output PAT in this output transport stream when in
manual routing mode. This parameter takes
immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs
already mapped to be deleted and re-added. This
will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

*GigE Tx Multicast Interface Identifies the specific GigE interface (1 or 2) used

as the output. When a GigE output stream’s
destination IP address is a Multicast IP address,
this setting defines the physical GigE interface that
will be used. Singlecast and broadcast GigE
outputs use the network stack’s routing table
(based on destination IP address) and the user
defined static routing table to determine which
physical GigE interface to use.

Output IP Address For GigE 1–3, it specifies the output IP address on

which to place data when in manual routing mode.
It is used with IP based output interfaces. The
Output IP address must be a valid class A, B, C, or
D address. Additionally, the output IP address and
UDP port for each GigE output must be unique for
each output stream. The same output IP address
can be used for multiple GigE outputs, but each
output stream must then have a unique UDP port.
This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on
the selected output stream to be deleted and re-
added. This will result in a momentary glitch in the
video stream.

144
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Output UDP Port For GigE 1–3, it specifies the output UDP port on
which to place data when in manual routing mode.
It is used with UDP based output interfaces. The
output UDP port must be from 0 to 65535.
This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on
the selected output stream to be deleted and re-
added. This will result in a momentary glitch in the
video stream.

Show Status Provides drop-list selections to:

• SEM PSI Table (Figure 4-76).
• Output Program Status Table (Figure 4-72 and
Figure 4-73).
• Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring
(Figure 4-54).
*Change requires SEM reboot.

145
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM UDP Mapping Example

In this mode, the sixteen-bit UDP port number is generated using the output
transport stream, UDP port offset value, and the output program number. The
UDP port number will always be an even number.
The UDP port bit fields are:
• UDP port bits 15 through 13 are the UDP port offset value.
• UDP port bits 12 through 9 are the output transport streams 1 through 16
(transport stream 1 is represented by 0x0 and transport stream 16 is
represented by 0xF).
• UDP port bits 8 through 1 are the output program numbers 1 through 256
(program number 1 is represented by 0x0 and program number 256 is
represented by 0xFF).
• UDP port bit 0 is always zero.
In general, the UDP port calculation is:
UDP Port = Offset + 512 * (Output Transport Stream – 1) + 2 * (Program
Number – 1)
Typical UDP mapping example with port offset value of 0 is provided in Table 4-
39:
Table 4-39 Example of UDP mapping with port offset of 0
Transport Stream ID Start Program Number of Calculated Input
Mappings UDP Ports in Hex
(Decimal)

1 1 0 –

2 1 0 –

3 1 0 –

4 1 0 –

5 1 0 –

6 1 0 –

7 1 0 –

8 1 0 –

9 1 20 0x1000 – 0x1026
(4096 – 4134)

10 1 20 0x1200 – 0x1226
(4608 – 4646)

11 1 20 0x1400 – 0x1426
(5120 – 5158)

12 1 20 0x1600 – 0x1626
(5632 – 5670)

146
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Transport Stream ID Start Program Number of Calculated Input

Mappings UDP Ports in Hex
(Decimal)

13 1 20 0x1800 – 0x1826
(6144 – 6182)

14 1 20 0x1A00 – 0x1A26
(6656 – 6694)

15 1 20 0x1C00 – 0x1C26
(7168 – 7206)

16 1 20 0x1E00 – 0x1E26
(7680 – 7718)

147
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP Mapping

The SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP Mapping window provides the
capability to specify the starting and ending program number range and the
transport stream identification used for the PAT in each transport stream that
was associated with an interface output in the SEM Output Transport Stream
Configuration window. Destination IP addresses and UDP port numbers are
also defined for GigE ports. The SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP
Mapping window is illustrated in Figure 4-58 and defined in Table 4-40.
Figure 4-58 SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP Mapping window

148
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-40 SEM VOD Control — Standardized UDP Mapping window field definitions
Item Definition

Input Program Pre-Encrypted When active (check mark), it indicates pre-encrypted

programs can be processed through the SEM.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Input Port Physical GigE input port of the UDP algorithm from the
VOD controller.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Mode Bit Setting Used as part of the UDP Port calculation. This setting
represents the 2 MSBs (bits 14 and 15) of the
calculated UDP Port.

Starting Transport Stream Index Sets the transport stream index as relative 0 or 1. The
output transport stream index is used as part of the
UDP port calculation and can be relative 0 (0 – 15) or
relative 1 (1 – 16).
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Output Transport Stream This column replicates the selections made for the
output interfaces on the SEM Output Transport
Stream Configuration window.

Starting Program Number Used in conjunction with Number Programs to indicate

a range of programs. This is the starting program
number of the first program on an output.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on the
specified output stream to be deleted and re-added.
This will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

Number Programs Used in conjunction with Starting Program Number to

indicate a range of programs. The maximum number
of programs is based on the configuration of the SEM
(based on PID Remapping flag and the number of PIDs
per service configuration). The default is 64 programs
per output stream; however, this can be increased to
252 programs per output.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on the
specified output stream to be deleted and re-added.
This will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

PAT TS ID The output transport stream ID to use for the output

PAT in this output transport stream. This parameter
takes immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on the
specified output stream to be deleted and re-added.

149
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

This will result in a momentary glitch in the video

stream.

*GigE Tx Multicast Interface Identifies the specific GigE interface (1 – 3) used as

the output. When a GigE output stream’s destination
IP address is a multicast IP address, this setting
defines the physical GigE interface that will be used.
Singlecast and broadcast GigE outputs use the
network stack’s routing table (based on destination IP
address) and the user-defined static routing table to
determine which physical GigE interface to use.

Output IP Address For GigE output transport streams, it specifies the

destination IP address. The Output IP address must be
a valid class A, B, C, or D address. Additionally, the
output IP address and UDP port for each GigE output
must be unique for each output stream. The same
output IP address can be used for multiple GigE
outputs, but each output stream must then have a
unique UDP port.
This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on the
specified output stream to be deleted and re-added.
This will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

Output UDP Port For GigE output transport streams, it specifies the
destination UDP port. This parameter takes immediate
effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on the
specified output stream to be deleted and re-added.
This will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

Show Status Provides drop-list selections to:

• SEM PSI Table (Figure 4-76).
• Output Program Status Table (Figure 4-72 and
Figure 4-73).
• Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring
(Figure 4-54).
* Change requires SEM reboot.

150
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM Standardized UDP Mapping Example

In this mode, the sixteen-bit UDP port number is generated using the output
transport stream index, relative 0/1 transport stream setting, and the output
program number.
The UDP port bit fields are:
• UDP port bits 15 and 14 are the mapping mode (default 0x0, mode 0).
• UDP port bits 13 through 8 are the output transport stream index (0 – 15 or
1 – 16, depending on relative 0/1 transport stream setting).
• UDP port bits 7 through 0 are the output program numbers 1 – 255 (relative
1; program number 1 is represented as 0x01, program number 255 is
represented as 0xFF).

151
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

In general, the UDP Port calculation (mode 0 only) is:

• UDP Port = 49152 + (256 * Output Transport Stream) + Program
Number
Typical UDP mapping example with port offset value of 0 is provided in
Table 4-41.

Table 4-41 Example of Standardized UDP mapping with relative 1 transport stream index
TransportStream ID Start Program Number of Calculated Input
Mappings UDP Ports in Hex
(Decimal)

1 1 20 –

2 1 20 –

3 1 20 –

4 1 20 –

5 1 20 –

6 1 20 –

7 1 20 –

8 1 20 –

9 1 20 0x0101 – 0x0114
(257 – 276)

10 1 20 0x0201 – 0x0214
(513 – 532)

11 1 20 0x0301 – 0x0314
(769 – 788)

12 1 20 0x0401 – 0x0414
(1026 – 1048)

13 1 0 0x0501 – 0x0514
(1281 – 1300)

14 1 0 0x0601 – 0x0614
(1537 – 1556)

15 1 0 0x0701 – 0x0714
(1793 – 1812)

16 1 0 0x0801 – 0x0814
(2049 – 2068)

152
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

ASI Demultiplexing Configuration

This window is for ASI interface ports only. It provides quicker setup than the
SEM VOD Control — Manual Remapping window. For each ASI input, this
window provides the capability to specify the starting and ending program
number range and the transport stream identification used by the PAT for each
transport stream that was associated with an interface output in the SEM
Output Transport Stream Configuration window. Destination IP addresses and
UDP port numbers are also defined for GigE 1-3 ports. The ASI Demultiplexing
Configuration window is illustrated in Figure 4-59 and defined in Table 4-42.
Figure 4-59 ASI Demultiplexing Configuration window

153
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-42 ASI Demultiplexing Configuration window field definitions

Item Definition

Input Program Pre-Encrypted When active (check mark), it indicates pre-encrypted

programs can be processed through the SEM.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Output Transport Stream This column replicates the selections made for the
output interfaces on the SEM Output Transport Stream
Configuration window. GigE interface ports are not
specified. It is view only. Changing this setting will
cause all programs already mapped to be deleted and
re-added. This will result in a momentary glitch in the
video stream.

ASI Input Port The ASI port that is the transport stream source.

Starting Program Number Used in conjunction with Number Programs to indicate

a range of programs. This is the starting program
number of the first program on an output. Changing
this setting will cause all programs already mapped to
be deleted and re-added. This will result in a
momentary glitch in the video stream.

Number Programs (<=64) Used in conjunction with Starting Program Number to

indicate a range of programs. The maximum number
of programs is based on the configuration of the SEM
(based on PID Remapping flag and number of PIDs per
service configuration). The default is 64 programs per
output stream; however, this can be increased to
support up to 252 programs per output. Changing this
setting will cause all programs already mapped to be
deleted and re-added. This will result in a momentary
glitch in the video stream.

PAT TS ID The output transport stream ID to use for the output

PAT in this output transport stream when in manual
routing mode. This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

*GigE Tx Multicast Interface Identifies the specific GigE interface (1 – 3) used as

the output. When a GigE output stream’s destination
IP address is a Multicast IP address, this setting
defines the physical GigE interface that will be used.
Singlecast and broadcast GigE outputs utilize the
network stack’s routing table (based on destination IP
address) and the user defined static routing table to
determine which physical GigE interface to use.

154
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Output IP Address For GigE 1–3, it specifies the output IP address on

which to place data when in manual routing mode. It is
used with IP-based output interfaces. This parameter
takes immediate effect; however, it still must be
applied for the change to be permanent. The Output IP
address must be a valid class A, B, C, or D address.
Additionally, the output IP address and UDP port for
each GigE output must be unique for each output
stream. The same output IP address can be used for
multiple GigE outputs, but each output stream must
then have a unique UDP port.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Output UDP Port For GigE 1–3, it specifies the output UDP port on
which to place data when in manual routing mode. It is
used with UDP-based output interfaces. The output
UDP port must be from 0 to 65535. This parameter
takes immediate effect. Changing this setting will
cause all programs already mapped to be deleted and
re-added. This will result in a momentary glitch in the
video stream.

Show Status Provides drop-list selections to:

• SEM PSI Table (Figure 4-76).
• Output Program Status Table (Figure 4-72 and Figure
4-73).
• Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring
(Figure 4-54).
* Change requires SEM reboot.

155
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM VOD Control — 8 Channel UDP Mapping

This window is for QAM output to emulate SEM-like devices. Only eight output
transport streams can be configured (eight QAMs or GigE output). It provides
quicker setup than the SEM VOD Control–Manual Remapping window. For each
QAM input, this window provides the capability to specify the starting and
ending program number range and the transport stream identification used by
the PAT for each transport stream that was associated to a QAM interface
output in the SEM Output Transport Stream Configuration window. Destination
IP addresses and UDP port numbers are also defined for the GigE ports. The
SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping (8 Channel) window is illustrated in Figure
4-60 and defined in Table 4-43.
Figure 4-60 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping (8 Channel) window

156
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-43 SEM VOD Control — UDP Mapping (8 Channel) window field definitions
Item Definition

Input Program Pre-Encrypted When active (check mark), it indicates pre-encrypted

programs can be processed through the SEM.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Input Port Physical GigE input port of the UDP algorithm from the
VOD controller.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Output Transport Stream This column replicates the QAM selections made for
the output interfaces on the SEM Output Transport
Stream Configuration window.

Starting Program Number Used in conjunction with Number Programs to indicate

a range of programs. This is the starting program
number of the first program on an output.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

Number Programs Used in conjunction with Starting Program Number to

indicate a range of programs. The maximum number
of programs is based on the configuration of the
Output Transport Stream (based on the PID
Remapping setting). The default is 64 programs per
output stream; however, this can be increased to
support up to 252 programs per output.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

PAT TS ID The output transport stream ID to use for the output

PAT in this output transport stream when in manual
routing mode. This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs already
mapped to be deleted and re-added. This will result in
a momentary glitch in the video stream.

*GigE Tx Multicast Interface Identifies the specific GigE interface (1 – 3) used as

the output. When a GigE output stream’s destination
IP address is a Multicast IP address, this setting
defines the physical GigE interface that will be used.
Singlecast and broadcast GigE outputs utilize the
network stack’s routing table (based on destination IP
address) and the user defined static routing table to
determine which physical GigE interface to use.

157
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Output IP Address For GigE output transport streams, it specifies the

destination IP address. The Output IP address must be
a valid class A, B, C, or D address. Additionally, the
output IP address and UDP port for each GigE output
must be unique for each output stream. The same
output IP address can be used for multiple GigE
outputs, but each output stream must then have a
unique UDP port.
This parameter takes immediate effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on the
specified output stream to be deleted and re-added.
This will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

Output UDP Port For GigE output transport streams, it specifies the
destination UDP port. This parameter takes immediate
effect.
Changing this setting will cause all programs on the
specified output stream to be deleted and re-added.
This will result in a momentary glitch in the video
stream.

Show Status Provides drop-list selections to:

• SEM PSI Table (Figure 4-76).
• Output Program Status Table (Figure 4-72 and Figure
4-73).
• Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring
(Figure 4-54).
* Change requires SEM reboot.

158
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM 8 Channel UDP Mapping Example

In this mode, the sixteen-bit UDP port number is generated using the output
QAM port and the output program number. The eight most significant bits of
the UDP port represent the QAM port number and the eight least significant
bits represent the program number.
As shown in Table 4-44, UDP port bits 15 through 8 are for the QAM port
numbers (one bit per port):

Table 4-44 Typical example of mapped UDP port bits 15 through 8

Bit QAM Port UDP Port Range in Hex
(Decimal)

15 QAM 4A (transport stream 15) 0x8001 – 0x80FF (32769 –

33023)

14 QAM 3A (transport stream 13) 0x4001 – 0x40FF (16385 –

16639)

13 QAM 2A (transport stream 0x2001 – 0x20FF (8193 –

11) 8447)

12 QAM 1A (transport stream 9) 0x1001 – 0x10FF (4097 –

4351)

11 QAM 4B (transport stream 16) 0x0801 – 0x08FF (2049 –

2303)

10 QAM 3B (transport stream 14) 0x0401 – 0x04FF (1025 -

1279)

9 QAM 2B (transport stream 12) 0x0201 – 0x02FF (513 – 767)

8 QAM 1B (transport stream 10) 0x0101 – 0x01FF (257 – 511)

159
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

As shown in Table 4-45, UDP port bits 7 through 0 are for program numbers 1
through 255:

Table 4-45 Typical example of mapped UDP port bits 7 through 0

Transport Stream ID Start Program Number of Calculated Input
Mappings UDP Ports in Hex
(Decimal)

1 – – –

2 – – –

3 – – –

4 – – –

5 – – –

6 – – –

7 – – –

8 – – –

9 1 20 0x1001 – 0x1014
(4097 – 4116)

10 1 20 0x0101 – 0x0114
(257 – 276)

11 1 20 0x2001 – 0x2014
(8193 – 8212)

12 1 20 0x0201 – 0x0214
(513 – 532)

13 1 20 0x4001 – 0x4014
(16385 – 16404)

14 1 20 0x0401 – 0x0414
(1025 – 1044)

15 1 20 0x8001 – 0x8014
(32769 – 32788)

16 1 20 0x0801 – 0x0814
(2049 – 2068)

160
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM VOD Control — Ancillary PID Routing

The SEM VOD Control — Ancillary PID Routing window provides the capability
to manually map non-service PIDs. Ancillary PIDs are non-service related, as
they are not part of any service (not listed as a component of any PMT). An
example application would be pass through of EMMs.
Clicking Enable PID Routing on (check mark) activates the lower panel of the
display to manually input parameter selections for each route. All selections
appear in the window display panel. Leaving Enable PID Routing inactive
(hollow) disables the lower panel, which appears blank. The SEM VOD Control
— Ancillary PID Routing window is illustrated in Figure 4-61 and defined in
Table 4-46.
Figure 4-61 SEM VOD Control — Ancillary PID Routing

161
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-46 SEM VOD Control — Ancillary PID Routing window field definitions
Item Definition

Index Index of PID Mapping Table. Values are from 1 to 128.

Enabled Indicates whether this PID mapping is enabled or disabled. Once

written, the change to this parameter will only take immediate effect
after Apply is clicked. This change must be saved to persist through
subsequent reboots.

Input Interface Number of the input type from which to obtain data. Specifies
GigE (1), ASI (2), or ENET (3).

Input UDP Port Input UDP port from which to obtain data. Used with UDP based
input interfaces; otherwise, it is ignored.

Input PID The input MPEG PID to multiplex. The PAT PID, 0x0000 and the Null
PID, 0x1FFF, cannot be mapped as ancillary PIDs. The range of
available input PIDs is 0x0001 – 0x1FFE.

Output PID Output PID to use for the data. When PID Remapping is enabled, the
SEM will enforce a range of PIDs that can be remapped. The Range
of PIDs is outside of the reserved range for services. The user can
only remap ancillary PIDs in the following ranges:
• 0x0001 – 0x002F and 0x1C00 – 0x1FFE
Note that 0x1FFB is used as the EAS PID. If EAS is enabled,
then 0x1FFB cannot be mapped as an ancillary PID.

Output Stream Output transport stream number of the output on which to place
data. Zero indicates the entry is not used.

Output IP Address For GigE outputs, the destination IP address of the output stream.
The Output IP address must be a valid class A, B, C, or D address.
Additionally, the output IP address and UDP port for each GigE output
must be unique for each output stream. The same output IP address
can be used for multiple GigE outputs, but each output stream must
then have a unique UDP port.

Output UDP Port For GigE outputs, GigE destination UDP port. The UDP port must be
from 0 to 65535.

Output Frequency The frequency in Hz of the output stream (applies only to QAM
output streams). The QAM Frequency is configured in the QAM
configuration window.

162
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Enable PID Routing When enabled (check mark), the lower panel displays for manual
input of parameters, as determined by the value entered into Index
for the targeted line to be edited. The parameters that can be
modified on a selected index line are as follows:
Index Line Enable Manual Routing Field
Index Index — indicates the highlighted index
line in the upper window panel.
Input Interface Input Interface Selection — can be ASI,
GigE 1–3 or ENET1–2.
Input UDP Port Input UDP Port – appears only if Input
Interface Selection is GigE 1–3 or ENET1–
2.
Output Stream Output Transport Stream — can be QAM,
GigE 1–3, or ENET1–2.
Output UDP Port Output UDP Port — appears only if Output
Transport Stream is GigE 1–3, or ENET1–2.
Output IP Address Output IP Address — appears only if
Output Transport Stream is GigE 1–3, or
ENET1–2.
Output Frequency Output Frequency — appears only if
Output Transport Stream is QAM.
Input PID Input PID Number (Hex) — input MPEG
PID to multiplex.
Output PID Output PID Number (Hex) – output PID to
use for the data.

Show Status Provides drop-list selections to:

• SEM PSI Table (Figure 4-76).
• Output Program Status Table (Figure 4-72 and Figure 4-73).
• Output Transport Stream Utilization Monitoring (Figure 4-54).

163
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

CTE Configuration and Status Windows

The CTE windows are accessible under the VOD Control menu. Refer to Figure
4-62.
Figure 4-62 SEM Element Manager VOD Control

164
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

ICE Program Configuration

The ICE Program Configuration window is available in any Internal SEM Device
Operating Mode. This window is used to enable or disable Common Tier
Encryption, as well as to define the encryption settings. Any change to these
parameters will cause a momentary loss of service on all SEM outputs. This is
due to the fact that all programs mapped are unmapped and re-mapped to
perform the CTE change. The ICE Program Configuration window is illustrated
in Figure 4-63 and defined in Table 4-47.
Figure 4-63 SEM ICE Program Configuration

165
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-47 ICE Program Configuration

Item Definition

Common Tier Encryption Enabled Enable, or disable, Common Tier Encryption. If

CTE is disabled, all other settings in this
window will be grayed out. CTE cannot be
enabled unless the SEM has been licensed for
CTE and the ACP module is present.

Configured Encryption Mode Set the global encryption mode that the SEM
will attempt to use to encrypt output
programs. Default value is “Clear.”
• Clear — The SEM performs no encryption of
output programs.
• Fixed Program Key — The SEM attempts to
use Fixed Program Key encryption. The
SEM will not attempt to get Entitlement
Management Messages.
• Full — The SEM attempts to use Full
encryption. The SEM will attempt to get
Entitlement Management Messages from
an EMM server.
Current Encryption Mode Encryption mode that the SEM is actually
using to encrypt output programs. The current
encryption mode is based on the Configured
Encryption Mode setting and the status of the
ACPs. The Current Encryption Mode can differ
from the Configured Encryption Mode if all
requirements for the Configured Encryption
Mode are not met.
• Clear — The SEM is considered to be in
Clear mode when Configured Encryption
Mode is set to “Clear.”
• Fixed Program Key — The SEM is
considered to be in Fixed Program Key
mode when Configured Encryption Mode is
set to “Fixed Program Key,” or when
Configured Encryption Mode is set to “Full”
and the status of one or more ACPs
indicates that full encryption is not available.
• Full — The SEM is considered to be in Full
encryption mode when Configured
Encryption Mode is set to “Full” and the
status of all ACPs indicate that full
encryption is available.

166
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

CCI Level Copy Control Information Level:

• CCI Not Defined — Set-top box applications
can configure the CCI Level.
• Copy Freely — No restriction on program
copying.
• Copy Once — Program can be copied only
once.
• Copy Never — Program can never be
copied.

The default selection is Copy Never.

CCI Source Source of the Copy Control Information Level

to use for all output programs. Default value is
“Input CCI Descriptor.”
• Input CCI Descriptor — The CCI level for
each output program will be the CCI level of
the associated input program. If the input
program does not contain a CCI descriptor,
then the SEM CCI Level setting will be
used.
• Configured CCI Setting Only — The SEM
CCI Level setting is used for all output
programs.

The default selection is Input CCI

Descriptor.
Epoch Duration Length in hours of each program epoch. Valid
entries are 1 – 24.
Default value is 24.

CIT Setting Constrained Image Trigger setting. Default

value is “Disabled.”
• Enabled — The set-top box is notified to not
allow high-quality digital output unless the
receiving device also adheres to CIT
processing.
• Disabled — CIT processing is not used.
Note that if the APS Setting is “Analog
Protection Not Defined”, the CIT Setting has
no effect.

The default selection is Disabled.

167
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

APS Setting Analog Protection System. Default value is

“Copy Protection Off.”
• Analog Protection Not Defined — Set-top
box applications can configure APS.
• Copy Protection Off — No analog
protection.
• AGC On Split Burst Off — Split burst off.
• AGC On 2 Line Split On — 2 line split burst
on.
• AGC On 4 Line Split On — 4 line split burst
on.

The default selection is Copy Protection Off.

Program Tier Program tier used to encrypt all output
programs. Valid entries are 0 – 16777215.
65536 is reserved and cannot be entered.

The default value is 257.

DVS-042/SCTE 52 Encryption This enables or disables encryption using DVS-

042/SCTE 52. This setting is only applicable
when the Encryption Algorithm (Advanced
screen) is set to DES.
This setting should be Enabled when the SEM
is used to encrypt services in a headend along
with other non-Motorola edge devices that are
also encrypting using DVS-042/SCTE 52.
The default selection is Disabled.

Set Defaults Clicking this button causes the following fields

to be reset to their default settings:
• CCI Level
• CCI Source
• Epoch Duration
• APS Setting
• CIT Setting
• Program Tier
• DVS-042/SCTE-52
Ice Program Status Clicking this button opens the Ice Program
Status window.

168
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

ICE Program Status

The ICE Program Status window is available in any Internal SEM Device
Operating Mode. This window displays information about the current and past
encryption modes and the current program epoch. It is illustrated in Figure 4-64
and defined in Table 4-48.
Figure 4-64 ICE Program Status

169
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-48 ICE Program Status window field definitions

Item Definition

GPS Time Time that the SEM entered the displayed

“Encryption Mode.”

Encryption Mode Encryption mode that the SEM entered at the

given GPS Time.
• Clear — The SEM is considered to be in
clear mode when Configured Encryption
Mode is set to “Clear.”
• Fixed Program Key — The SEM is
considered to be in Fixed Program Key mode
when Configured Encryption Mode is set to
“Fixed Program Key,” or when Configured
Encryption Mode is set to “Full” and the
status of one or more ACPs indicates that
full encryption is not available.
• Full — The SEM is considered to be in Full
encryption mode when Configured
Encryption Mode is set to “Full,” and the
status of all ACPs indicate that full
encryption is available.
Reason Reason that the SEM entered the displayed
“Encryption Mode.”
The following reasons are possible:
• Configuration — The user configured this
mode in the ICE Program Configuration
window.
• No EMM — The SEM has not received
EMMs from an EMM server since entering
Full encryption mode.
• Lost EMM — The SEM has lost
communication with an EMM server and any
previously held EMMs have expired.
• Received EMM — The SEM has received
EMMs from an EMM server.
Current Encryption Mode Encryption mode that the SEM is actually using
to encrypt output programs. The current
encryption mode is based on the Configured
Encryption Mode setting and the status of the
ACPs. The Current Encryption Mode can differ
from the Configured Encryption Mode if all
requirements for the Configured Encryption
Mode are not met.
• Clear — The SEM is considered to be in
clear mode when Configured Encryption
Mode is set to “Clear.”
• Fixed Program Key — The SEM is
considered to be in Fixed Program Key mode
when Configured Encryption Mode is set to
“Fixed Program Key,” or when Configured
Encryption Mode is set to “Full,” and the
status of one or more ACPs indicates that
full encryption is not available.
170
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

• Full — The SEM is considered to be in Full

encryption mode when Configured
Encryption Mode is set to “Full” and the
status of all ACPs indicate that full
encryption is available.
Current Epoch Number In Use Current epoch number used to encrypt all
output programs.
The epoch number will increment from
2 to 255 and then reset to 2.

Time Until Current Program Epoch Expires Time remaining in the current program epoch.
When this time reaches zero, the Current
Epoch Number In Use will increment and the
time will reset.

SEM ICE Full Encryption Failure Count Number of times the SEM has reverted to
Fixed Program Key mode, causing an SEM ICE
Full Encryption Failure Alarm.

SEM ICE Full Encryption Failure Alarm This alarm is set when the Configured
Encryption Mode is Full, but the Current
Encryption Mode is Clear or Fixed Program
Key. The alarm will clear when the SEM enters
Full encryption mode, when the user
configures the SEM to no longer be in Full
encryption mode, or when the Reset Count
button is clicked.

Reset Count Clicking this button causes SEM ICE Full

Encryption Failure Count to reset to zero and
clears the SEM ICE Full Encryption Failure
Alarm.

171
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

SEM VOD Control — ICE EMM Configuration

The SEM VOD Control — ICE EMM Configuration window provides the
capability to specify the EMM server polling and startup randomization period,
as well as the polling timeout and retry count. It provides the capability to
specify the EMM Server IP Address and Port and the EMM Server
Communication Timeout. Additionally, it provides the capability to set default
ICE EMM configuration values and to initiate an EMM rollover sequence. The
SEM only needs to communicate with an EMMS when it is in Full Encryption
mode. The ICE EMM configuration parameters are not applicable unless the
SEM is configured to be in Full Encryption mode. The ICE EMM Configuration
window is illustrated in Figure 4-65 and defined in Table 4-49.
Figure 4-65 ICE EMM Configuration window

172
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-49 ICE EMM Configuration definitions

Item Definition

EMM Polling Interval (minutes) The SEM polls the EMM server for a category
sequence number (CSN) and a state as often
as this field specifies. The polling interval can
range from 15 to 1440 minutes. After receiving
the CSN and state, the SEM will determine if it
needs to request new EMMs from the EMM
server. If the SEM is unable to communicate
with the EMM server, the SEM will revert to a
15 minute polling period interval until
communication with the EMM server is re-
established.

EMM Polling Randomization Interval Maximum amount of time, in minutes, to delay

(minutes) the first EMM server poll following startup.
This prevents the possibility of having too
many SEMs polling the EMM server
simultaneously. The actual delay time will be
randomly calculated by the SEM and will be no
greater than this value, which can range
from 0 to 10 minutes. A value of 0 means no
delay and the SEM will poll immediately at
startup.
Note that when the SEM is first booted, CTE is
enabled, and the Encryption mode is set to
Full, the SEM will not be able to go to full
encryption until after the SEM establishes
communication with the EMMS. This will not
occur until after this polling randomization time
has expired. This can cause the SEM to take
up to 10 minutes before going to Full
encryption. Setting this value to 0 will force the
SEM to immediately poll the EMMS upon
booting.

EMM Polling Timeout (seconds) Amount of time, in seconds, that the SEM will
wait for a poll response from the EMM server.
If a response is not received within the
designated timeout period the SEM will retry
the poll.

EMM Polling Retry Count The number of times that the SEM will attempt
to retry a timed out EMM server poll. An
EMMS Invalid Response or EMMS
Communications Failure alarm will be issued
after the last retry.

EMM Server IP Address Class A, B, or C IP address of the EMM server.

EMM Server Port EMM server TCP Port 0 to 65535. Default is

8080 (standard DAC 6000 EMM Server port
number).

EMM Server Communication Timeout This is the amount of time, in days, that the
(Days) SEM will keep all programs in full encryption
mode after communication with the EMM
server fails. The SEM will switch to FPK
173
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

encryption mode upon expiration of this time

period. The duration start time is based on the
time when the SEM was last able to
successfully communicate with the EMMS.

Set Defaults Configures all ICE EMM Configuration

parameters to factory-default values. The
Server IP and UDP port are not reset to their
default values.

Force EMM Rollover Forces the SEM to retrieve new EMMs

(rollover sequence).

SEM VOD Control — ICE EMM Status

The SEM VOD Control — ICE EMM Status window provides a table of the
most recent EMM server polls. It displays the current CSN in use, the time
remaining before the next EMM server poll, the time remaining until expiration
of full encryption, and the last time an EMM rollover occurred. It presents
counts of communications errors, invalid responses, and encryption failures, as
well as various alarms and buttons for resetting and clearing. This window is
only valid when the SEM is configured to be in Full Encryption mode. It is
illustrated in Figure 4-66 and defined in Table 4-50.
Figure 4-66 ICE EMM Status window

174
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-50 ICE EMM Status definitions

Item Definition

GPS Time GPS time of the state transition.

CSN EMM server Category Sequence Number

(CSN).

State The state of the EMM transition. Indicates

EMM transition state reported by the EMMS.
Transition Complete, Transition Start, or Start
of New Epoch.

ACP Address This is the address of the Access Control

Processor (ACP) associated with the error
reported by the EMM server in the EMMS
Error column. If no address is contained in this
entry, the error reported applies to all ACPs or
to the entire SEM.

EMMS Error See below.

Current CSN In Use (0-255) This is the current Category Sequence

Number (CSN) that the SEM is using for
encrypting all programs. When the last poll
indicates that the EMM server is starting or
that it has completed a category epoch
transition, the current CSN in use is one larger
than the last CSN reported by the EMM
server. Otherwise, the current CSN in use is
equal to the last CSN reported by the EMM
server.

Time Before Next EMM Poll (days Time remaining until the next EMM poll.
hh:mm:ss)

Full Encryption Expiration Time (days Amount of time remaining before the SEM will
hh:mm:ss) automatically revert from Full encryption to
Fixed Program Key (FPK) mode. This occurs as
a result of a communication error or an invalid
response from the EMM server. The amount
of time is based on the user-configurable
EMM Server Communication Timeout and
when the SEM last successfully received
EMMs (See Table 4-46).
If this box is Magenta, it indicates that the
SEM has already gone from Full Encryption
mode to FPK mode (error). The time indicates
how long the SEM has been out of Full
Encryption mode. This can be used to
determine the time when the SEM went into
FPK mode due to an error.

Last Time EMM Rollover Performed (GPS) The time in GPS when the SEM last
performed a successful EMM rollover request
since bootup. The time is when the SEM
started the EMM rollover request.

175
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Number EMMS Communication Errors The number of times that the SEM was
unable to establish communications with the
EMM server. A communication is considered
to be in error after all user configurable EMM
Polling Retry Counts have been exhausted
(See Table 4-46). This count can be reset via
the adjacent Reset Counts button.

Number EMMS Invalid Responses The number of invalid responses received

from an EMM server. This count can be reset
via the adjacent Reset Counts button.

EMMS Communication Failure Alarm This alarm is set whenever the SEM is unable
to communicate with the EMM server. This
alarm is cleared whenever communication is
re-established, the SEM mode is configured to
Clear or FPK, or the user manually clears the
alarm.

EMMS Invalid Response Alarm Set whenever the SEM receives an invalid
response from the EMM server. This alarm is
cleared whenever a valid response is received,
the SEM mode is configured to Clear or FPK,
or the user manually clears the alarm.

SEM ICE Full Encryption Failure Count A count of the number of times the SEM
alarmed due to a full encryption error.

SEM ICE Full Encryption Failure Alarm Indicates that even though the SEM is
configured to be in full encryption, it can not
be due to EMM server communications or
invalid response errors. The alarm will clear
when the SEM returns to full encryption.

Reset Counts Reset both EMM server Communication

Failure and Invalid Response counters to 0.

Clear Alarm (EMM Server Communications Clear any alarms caused by the failure to poll
Failure) the EMM server.

Clear Alarm (EMM Server Invalid Response) Clear any alarms caused by the reception of
invalid EMM server responses.

Reset Count (SEM ICE Full Encryption

Failure Count)

176
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-51 EMMS Client Errors

EMMS Error (Client) Error Number Description

Invalid Response

PE_ERROR_PARSE 0x00020003 Parsing error in EMM

Server response message.

PE_ERROR_BAD_FORM 0x00020005 Schema error in EMM

Server response message.

PE_ERROR_BAD_DEC_DATA 0x00020006 Context schema error in

EMM Server response
message.

EMMC_BAD_PAYLOAD_VALUE 0x00020014 Invalid PayloadId element

in EMM Server response
message.

EMMC_BAD_SEMID_VALUE 0x00020015 Invalid SemId element in

EMM Server response
message.

EMMS_STATUS_ERROR 0x00020016 Invalid Server response

status (not 200 OK).

EMMS_BAD_DATA 0x00020017 Erroneous context

response received from
Server.

EMMS_EMM_BAD_UA 0x00020019 Invalid Unit Address from

EMM data.

EMMS_EMM_BAD_CRC 0x0002001A Invalid CRC from EMM

data.

Communications Errors

EMMC_SOCKET_ERROR 0x0002000E VxWorks socket error.

EMMC_CONNECT_ERROR 0x0002000F Connect error attempting

to connect to EMM Server.

EMMC_SEND_ERROR 0x00020010 VxWorks detected socket

send error.

EMMC_RECV_ERROR 0x00020011 VxWorks detected socket

receive error.

EMMC_RECV_TIMEOUT 0x00020012 Receive socket timeout.

EMMC_SOCKET_RECV_ERROR 0x00020013 Receive socket timeout on

a multi-packet server
response.

EMMC_ERROR_INVALID_IP 0x0002001B Invalid IP Address

of 0.0.0.0.

Other Errors

PE_NO_DATA 0x00020001 Legacy error not currently

used.

177
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

EMMS Error (Client) Error Number Description

PE_ERROR_NO_MEM 0x00020002 Protocol engine memory

acquisition failure during
decode process.

PE_ERROR_BUFOUT 0x00020004 Protocol engine memory

acquisition failure during
encode process.

PE_ERROR_BAD_ENC_DATA 0x00020007 Schema error in EMM

client request message.

PE_ERROR_BAD_CONFIG 0x00020008 Invalid schema request in

protocol engine
registration.

EMMC_PE_FAULT 0x00020009 Protocol engine registration

failure.

EMMC_ERROR_NO_MEM 0x0002000A Encode and/or decode

memory partitions
unavailable.

EMMC_ERROR_BAD_DATA 0x0002000B Invalid request to EMM

Client.

EMMC_ERROR_BAD_HTTP_DATA 0x0002000C Legacy error not currently

used.

EMMC_UNKNOWN_PE_ERROR 0x0002000D Unknown error received

from protocol engine class.

EMMS_BAD_CONTENT 0x00020018 Legacy error not currently

used.

Table 4-52 EMMS Server Errors

EMMS Error (Server) Error Number Description

Invalid Response

PE_ERROR_PARSE 0x00010003 Parsing error in EMM

Server response message.

PE_ERROR_BAD_FORM 0x00010005 Schema error in EMM

Server response message.

PE_ERROR_BAD_DEC_DATA 0x00010006 Context schema error in

EMM Server response
message.

EMMC_BAD_PAYLOAD_VALUE 0x00010014 Invalid PayloadId element

in EMM Server response
message.

EMMC_BAD_SEMID_VALUE 0x00010015 Invalid SemId element in

EMM Server response
message.

EMMS_STATUS_ERROR 0x00010016 Invalid Server response

178
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

EMMS Error (Server) Error Number Description

status (not 200 OK).

EMMS_BAD_DATA 0x00010017 Erroneous context

response received from
Server.

EMMS_EMM_BAD_UA 0x00010019 Invalid Unit Address from

EMM data.

EMMS_EMM_BAD_CRC 0x0001001A Invalid CRC from EMM

data.

Communications Errors

EMMC_SOCKET_ERROR 0x0001000E VxWorks socket error.

EMMC_CONNECT_ERROR 0x0001000F Connect error attempting

to connect to EMM Server.

EMMC_SEND_ERROR 0x00010010 VxWorks detected socket

send error.

EMMC_RECV_ERROR 0x00010011 VxWorks detected socket

receive error.

EMMC_RECV_TIMEOUT 0x00010012 Receive socket timeout.

EMMC_SOCKET_RECV_ERROR 0x00010013 Receive socket timeout on

a multi-packet server
response.

EMMC_ERROR_INVALID_IP 0x0001001B Invalid IP Address

of 0.0.0.0.

Other Errors

PE_NO_DATA 0x00010001 Legacy error not currently

used.

PE_ERROR_NO_MEM 0x00010002 Protocol engine memory

acquisition failure during
decode process.

PE_ERROR_BUFOUT 0x00010004 Protocol engine memory

acquisition failure during
encode process.

PE_ERROR_BAD_ENC_DATA 0x00010007 Schema error in EMM

client request message.

PE_ERROR_BAD_CONFIG 0x00010008 Invalid schema request in

protocol engine
registration.

EMMC_PE_FAULT 0x00010009 Protocol engine registration

failure.

EMMC_ERROR_NO_MEM 0x0001000A Encode and/or decode

memory partitions
unavailable.

179
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

EMMS Error (Server) Error Number Description

EMMC_ERROR_BAD_DATA 0x0001000B Invalid request to EMM

Client.

EMMC_ERROR_BAD_HTTP_DATA 0x0001000C Legacy error not currently

used.

EMMC_UNKNOWN_PE_ERROR 0x0001000D Unknown error received

from protocol engine class.

EMMS_BAD_CONTENT 0x00010018 Legacy error not currently

used.

Table 4-53 EMMS Timeout Error

EMMS Error (Timeout) Error Number Description

Timeout Error 0x00030000 Communications timeout

error.

180
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status
Clicking Status on the SEM-EM menu bar displays the drop-down list, as
illustrated in Figure 4-67.
Figure 4-67 Status drop-down list

Reference the applicable subsection for those Status windows that were
invoked from button selections of other windows. Status windows that are
selected solely from the menu drop-down list are described in the subsections
that follow:

181
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Alarms
This window represents a software panel of monitored conditions (alarms) in
the SEM. Although not applicable to all alarm conditions, the six status levels
are OK (green), Indeterminate (gray), Warning (yellow), Minor alarm (blue),
Major alarm (magenta), and Critical alarm (red). A Warning and Minor and Major
alarms do not prevent the SEM from performing operational requirements. A
Critical alarm prevents the SEM from performing operational requirements. The
Status — Alarms window is illustrated in Figure 4-68 and defined in Table 4-54.
Figure 4-68 Alarms and Events window

182
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-54 Alarms window field definitions

Condition Description Level Comments

Load Device Command Alarms

Zero System Time Indicates the SEM did not Major Not applicable when
receive a time update since the the time source is
last reboot. It is set 70 seconds internal.
after the SEM is rebooted if the
SEM did not receive an update
within that time interval.

Missing Time Indicates the SEM did not Warning Not applicable when
Update receive a time update for more the time source is
than 600 seconds (10 minutes). internal.

No Commands Indicates the Command Table Warning Not applicable when

Waiting is empty (there are no the SEM is internally
commands that are waiting to controlled.
be started). It is set 60 seconds
after the first time update is
received and the command
table is empty.

Command Table Indicates the Command Table Warning and Not applicable when
Near Full is near or 100% full. Checks Minor the SEM is internally
the maximum number of controlled.
commands relative to available
NVRAM storage. The SEM can
handle 10000 commands and
23000 blocks (64 bytes per
block) of NVRAM storage.
Warning alarm occurs if the
Command Table >= 90% full
and < 98% full.
Minor alarm occurs if the
Command Table is >= 98% full.

183
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

Service In Error Indicates that a service Major Only applicable when

command is currently in error the SEM is used to
(unable to fully continue encrypt services.
processing). The alarm is set
after one or more service
commands is in error for more
than 60 seconds.
Applicable to very specific
errors, whereby the error could
be caused by either the input
stream being invalid or another
command with the input
stream is causing the error.
Two typical examples:
1 The command is in error if
mapping an input service to an
output and that PMT is not
referenced in the PAT. This
error condition is cleared if a
new PAT is received
referencing the PMT.
2 The number of PIDs in the
PMT is greater than the
number of PIDs supported.
This error condition is cleared if
a new PMT is received
referencing a valid number of
PIDs.

Waiting for Indicates one or more Major Not applicable when

Extracted Message commands are waiting more the SEM is in any of
than 60 seconds for an the UDP Port
extracted message (PAT, PMT). mapping modes or in
This alarm is cleared after all ASI Demux mode.
commands waiting for
extracted messages received
all of the messages.

Service Not Indicates one or more services Major Only applicable when
Authorized that are supposed to be fully the SEM is used to
encrypted are not authorized. encrypt services.
Authorized status is based on
the status reports from the
ACP (full encryption only).

184
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

SimulCrypt Alarm is applicable only when Major

Communication the operating mode is
Simulcrypt 1. Indicates one or
more SimulCrypt interfaces is
having a communications
failure. A failure can be
connecting to a defined ECMG
or a failure receiving data from
an EMMG.

Configuration Alarms

Hardware Fault Indicates that a Warning, Major,

hardware-related error and Critical
occurred. Examples include
missing or
uncommunicative hardware,
failures in initialization of
hardware, and failures to
configure hardware. These
can occur at startup or
when the system is
operational.
Types of HW Faults:
• Application File(s)
Download failure
• SPI Interface Initialization
failure
• PCI Interface Initialization
failure
• GigE Configuration failure
• MUX Configuration failure
• QAM Module
Communication failure
• Upconverter Module
Communication failure
• Unsupported/Incorrect
HW/FW Version (QAM,
UC, ACP)
• Encryption Entitlement
Certificate(s) not found
• Fatal Host Firmware
Exception
Invalid Initialization Indicates invalid initialization Warning Alarm can be cleared
Data data is encountered in the by the user.
config.ini or mancfg.ini at
system startup.

185
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

Hardware Alarms

Temperature Fault Indicates the Critical

temperature of the
SEM exceeded the
maximum allowed
(60 degrees Celsius).

Fan Fault “major” indicates one Major

fan has reduced RPM 1 fan has failed.
readings.
“critical” indicates two
or more fans have
reduced RPM readings.
NOTES:
1) SEM fan Critical
status 2 or more fans have
monitoring failed.
takes place at
approximately
5 second
intervals.
2) One fan is
monitored
each status
cycle. Each fan
is monitored
every
15 seconds.
3) Low fan is
below
7500 RPM
4) Stopped fan is
below
1000 RPM
5) Low fan must
be detected
for three
consecutive
readings to
cause alarm
(45 seconds).
6) Stopped fan
reading will
cause alarm
immediately.

186
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

Input Alarm

Physical Input Indicates that one or Critical Detection of link

Failure more physical active is used to
interfaces that are determine if a GigE is
configured as enabled active.
to receive input have a
This alarm can be
failure. Physical input
cleared by the user.
interfaces can be
disabled to prevent this
alarm when no input is
connected.

Output Transport Stream Alarms

Output Stream Indicates one or more output Critical

Overflow streams have an overflow.
This will cause glitching and
tiling in the video stream. This
can occur when the output
data rate is incorrectly
configured or the input data
being mapped to the output
exceeds the output data rate.
This can also occur if the input
data is extremely prone to
sudden bursts in nature. Input
that is prone to sudden data
bursts can cause the internal
SEM buffers to overflow,
resulting in an output overflow
condition.
If the output stream is a QAM
output, the QAM will typically
report an FEC Sync error
during an output stream
overflow.

Output Stream Indicates the threshold was Minor

Threshold met or exceeded for the
duration of the alarm delay by
one or more output transport
streams.

Output Stream Indicates host IP insert Critical

Host IP Overflow packets are being dropped.
This can occur if the Host IP
output configuration setting is
incorrect (not enough
bandwidth allocated for Host
IP buffer storage).

187
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

QAM Fault Indicates that one or more Critical

QAM Outputs had any or all of
the following occur in the last
status check interval:
• FIFO Error — Modulator
input buffer error.
• Scalar Error — Modulator
output buffer error.
• FEC Sync Error — FEC
encoder indicates loss of
MPEG lock.
• Clock PLL Error —
Modulator PLL error.
• Comm Error — Failure of
host processor to
communicate with the
QAM modulator.
The alarm will clear after all
QAM faults clear on all
outputs.
Warning: The FEC Sync error
is typically an indication that
the output stream is in an
overflow state. Check for the
output stream overflow alarm
when an FEC Sync error is
reported.

188
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

Upconverter Fault Indicates that one or more Critical

Upconverters had any or all of
the following occur in the last
status check interval:
• Synth Error — UC PLL error.
• RF High Error — RF level is
higher than configured.
• RF Low Error — RF output
level is lower than
configured.
• Comm Error — Failure of
host processor to
communicate with the UC.
The alarm will clear after all
Upconverter faults clear on all
outputs.
Warning: False RF Low or RF
High errors can be caused by
unterminated RF outputs. All
unused RF outputs should be
terminated or muted to
prevent false RF Low or RF
High errors.

GigE Redundancy Alarms

Threshold Indicates the threshold Minor Only applicable when

Exceeded was exceeded on the the GigE is in
in-use GigE port. Interface Redundant
mode.

Fail Over Fault Indicates the GigE has Major Only applicable when
autonomously failed the GigE is in
over to the backup Interface Redundant
interface. mode. Alarm can be
cleared in multiple
ways, including user
acknowledgement.

189
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

ICE Alarms

EMMS Major alarm when Major This alarm only

Communication communication applies when CTE
Failure between the SEM and mode is enabled and
Entitlement Encryption Mode is
Management Message set to “full.”
Server (EMMS) fails.
The alarm will clear
when communication
with the EMM Server
is restored or by
manually clearing the
alarm on the ICE EMM
Status Window.

EMMS Invalid Major alarm when the Major This alarm only
Response SEM receives an applies when CTE
invalid response or mode is enabled and
error from the Encryption Mode is
Entitlement set to “full.”
Management Message
Server (EMMS).
The alarm will clear
when the reason for
the invalid response or
error is corrected or by
manually clearing the
alarm on the ICE EMM
Status Window.

Full Encryption Major when the SEM Major This alarm only
Failure is configured to be in applies when CTE
full encryption and mode is enabled and
cannot be. Encryption Mode is
set to “full.”
The alarm will clear
when the SEM returns
to full encryption or the
user configures the
SEM to no longer be in
full encryption mode.

GigE Input Stream Alarms

ISA SDV High Bit This alarm is used to inform Major Only applicable in ISA
Rate the user when one or more SDV mode.
Gigabit Ethernet Input
Streams have a high bit rate
condition.

Input Stream This alarm is used to inform Major

Below Bit Rate the user when one or more
GigE Input Streams have a
low bit rate condition.

190
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Condition Description Level Comments

GigE Input MPTS Redundancy Alarms

Primary Below This alarm is used to inform Major

Threshold the user when one or more
GigE Input Streams
configured as the Primary
stream of a Redundant Pair
are below the configured
threshold.

Primary Failover to This alarm is used to inform Major

Backup the user when one or more
GigE Input Streams
configured as the Primary
stream of a Redundant Pair
have Failed Over to the
Secondary stream

SEM Unit Alarm

SEM Unit Alarm Highest alarm within Minor — Critical

the SEM.

191
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Events
This window represents a software panel of monitored events in the SEM. The
Status — Events window is illustrated in Figure 4-69 and defined in Table 4-55.
Figure 4-69 Events window

192
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-55 Events window field definitions

Condition Description Level Comments

Error Events

Load Device Errors This event counter is updated Minor Not applicable when
each time a Load Device (Load in internal control
SEM) command encounters a modes.
fatal error. It indicates the
command was deleted
because it was in error.

Physical Input This event counter is updated Critical Event trap data:
Errors each time a physical input
Info 1 — the physical
error occurs.
interface type code,
1 = GigE.
Info 2 — the physical
interface number,
GigE = 1–3.

Hardware Errors This event counter is updated Warning, Event trap data:
each time a hardware error Major, and
Info 1 — the
occurs. Critical
hardware error code.

Invalid Initialization This event counter is updated Warning

Data each time an invalid
initialization data item is
encountered in the config.ini
file at system startup.

Invalid This event counter is updated Warning

Configuration Data each time an invalid
configuration data item is
encountered in dynamically
configured data after startup.

Output Utilization Count of the SEM output Minor

Errors transport stream utilization
faults.

GigE Frame Buffer Number of buffer resets Major

Resets reported by the GigE
processor.

193
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Temperature and Fan

The Status — Temperature and Fan window provides Celsius readings of the
two temperature sensors and speeds in revolutions per minute of the three
fans. The Status — Temperature and Fan window is illustrated in Figure 4-70
and defined in Table 4-56.
Figure 4-70 Temperature and Fan

Table 4-56 Temperature and Fan window field definitions

Item Definition

Center Ambient Ambient temperature at the center temperature sensor in whole

(Celsius) number of degrees Celsius.

Right Ambient (Celsius) As viewed from the front of the SEM unit, ambient temperature at
the right temperature sensor in whole number of degrees Celsius.

Left Fan Speed As viewed from the front of the SEM unit, fan speed reading in
revolutions per minute of Fan 3.

Center Fan Speed Fan speed reading in revolutions per minute of the Fan 2.

Right Fan Speed As viewed from the front of the SEM unit, fan speed reading in
revolutions per minute of Fan 1.

194
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Load SEM Command Status

The Load SEM Command Status window indicates the status of the Load SEM
subcommand sequences generated by the DAC 6000 to configure the SEM.
The Load SEM Command Status window is illustrated in Figure 4-71 and
defined in Table 4-57.
Figure 4-71 Load SEM Command Status window

195
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-57 Load SEM Command Status window field definitions

Item Definition

Total Blocks The amount of free memory blocks available

for Load SEM commands. Each block contains
64 bytes of storage space. This field is
applicable only when the SEM is externally
controlled.

Blocks Available The total amount of memory blocks available

for Load SEM commands. This field is
applicable only when the SEM is externally
controlled.

Blocks Used Total Blocks – Blocks Available = Blocks Used.

Commands Active The number of Load SEM commands

currently active. A Load SEM command is
considered to be active if it is past its start
time but has not yet reached its stop time.
This field is applicable only when the SEM is
externally controlled.

Commands Waiting The number of Load SEM commands

currently waiting to execute. These
commands have not yet reached their start
time. This field is applicable only when the
SEM is externally controlled.

Extract Commands Waiting The number of Load SEM commands that are
waiting for extracted messages. This field is
applicable only when the SEM is externally
controlled.

196
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Output Program Status

This window shows what programs on the inputs are being remapped to what
programs on the outputs. When encryption is enabled, highlighting an item row
causes information to appear at the bottom of the window.
The SEM maps input programs to output streams in the same manner,
regardless of the Operating mode. Each input programmed mapped is mapped
to an output stream as follows:
1. Input PAT is extracted.
2. Using the input PAT, the corresponding input program number is used to
find the input PMT PID.
3. Using the input PMT PID, the input PMT is extracted.
4. Using the input PMT, the component PIDs and PCR PID are identified and
remapped or remultiplexed to the specified output. The PID values are
changed depending on the PID Remapping configuration parameter.
5. If the input program is pre-encrypted, and pre-encryption has been
selected, then the ECM PID is also remapped or remultiplexed to the
specified output stream. Additionally, the PIT PID is extracted and
reinserted into the output stream (the output program number in the PIT is
updated).
6. If the output program is being encrypted (input program is not pre-
encrypted), then the SEM will mark the component PIDs with the
appropriate scrambled control bit settings and encrypt the payload of the
component PIDs. Additionally, ECM messages such as the PRK and WKE
are inserted.
7. The output PAT and PMT are updated and inserted to contain the
appropriate PID and program number references.
The Output Program Status window is illustrated in Figure 4-72 and Figure 4-73
and defined in Table 4-58.

197
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Figure 4-72 Output Program Status window without encryption status

Figure 4-73 Output Program Status window with encryption status

198
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-58 Output Program Status window field definitions

Item Definition

Input Interface ASI 1–8 or GigE 1–3 input interface port.

Input Prog. No. MPEG program number in the input transport stream.

Input UDP Port Identifies the destination application for the MPEG service (UDP
port opened to receive service).

Output Stream This column replicates the transport stream-to-output interface

selections made in the SEM Output Transport Stream Configuration
window. This is the output stream to which the input program is
being mapped.

Output Prog. No MPEG service number in the output transport stream.

Encryption Status Encryption status is as follows:

• Full Encryption
— Full — Authorized
— Full — Not Authorized
— N/A (unknown)
• Unencrypted
• Fixed Program Key
• Fixed Working Key
• Clear — Service is not being encrypted and input program is not
pre-encrypted.
• Pre-encrypted — Input service is pre-encrypted.

199
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Program Status Output program status strings are as follows:

• Output Program Undefined — no program mapping defined.
• Output Program Defined — output program defined, but input
program not mapped to the output.
• Program Mapping Defined — transition state between reception
of input mapping command prior to extraction of input PAT.
• Waiting For Initial Input PAT — SEM is waiting for reception of an
input PAT.
• Waiting For PAT No PMT Found — input PAT received, but input
program not specified within the PAT.
• Waiting For Input PMT — input PAT received and input program
number specified, waiting for input PMT.
• Error — Input PIDs Already Mapped — input PMT contains
component PIDs that are being shared with other input services.
• Error — Max Components Exceeded — input PMT has more
component PID references than the SEM is configured to
support.
• Error — Invalid PCR PID In PMT — input PMT contains an invalid
PCR PID reference.
• Starting Program Pass Thru — SEM is passing through an entire
input program to an output (input PMT PID, ECM PID, PCR PID,
and all components are passed through unchanged to the output).
• Starting Program Remapping — SEM is remapping the input
program (all component PIDs are being remapped). PID
Remapping Enabled only.
• Starting Program Remuxing — SEM is remultiplexing the input
program. PID Remapping Disabled only.
• Passing Thru Input Program — SEM successfully passed through
an entire input program to an output (input PMT PID, ECM PID,
PCR PID, and all components are passed through unchanged to
the output).
• Remapping Program — SEM successfully remapped the input
program to the output stream (all component PIDs are remapped
to the output). PID Remapping Enabled only.
• Remultiplexing Program — SEM successfully remultiplexed the
input program to the output stream (all component PIDs are
remuxed to the output). PID Remapping Disabled only.
• Stopping Program Pass Thru — SEM is stopping an input program
pass through. Typically occurs when a program mapping is being
removed.
• Stopping Program Remapping — SEM is stopping an input
program remapping. Typically occurs when a program mapping is
being removed. PID Remapping Enabled only.
• Stopping Program Remuxing — SEM is stopping an input
program remultiplexing. Typically occurs when a program
mapping is being removed. PID Remapping Disabled only.

200
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

PSIP Status (scroll Indicates the current PSIP state:

right)
1 — Not applicable.

PSIP Fixing is not enabled. Alternately, if PSIP Fixing is enabled, this

means that the mapped input service does not exist (i.e. a PMT
does not exist for the particular service).
2 — Incomplete, waiting for MGT.

The SEM is unable to extract an MGT message from the input

stream that contains the mapped service. Typically the input does
not contain any other PSIP messages.
3 — Incomplete, waiting for VCT.

The SEM is unable to extract a VCT. Even though the input stream
may contain PSIP services, the particular mapped service is not
found in the input stream’s VCT table.
4 — Incomplete, waiting for EIT.

The SEM is unable to extract an EIT.

5 — PSIP fixing complete.

All required input PSIP messages are being extracted.

6 — GigE EIT Limit Reached.
The maximum supported extraction limit of 24 GigE EITs has been
reached. This service shall be queued until capacity becomes
available. This only applies to services mapped from GigE inputs.

Unit Address The 40-bit ACP address and the same address presented in human
readable code (hex format).
Human Readable

EMM Count Indicates the number of Category Rekey messages sent to this
ACP.

Category Sequence The current and next Category Sequence Numbers.

Number

Encryption Mode Same as Encryption Status.

Field colors:
• Green — encryption authorized.
• Red — encryption not authorized.
Current Program Epoch Indicates the current program epoch number for the service on this
side of the ACP.

Current Reason Code The ACP authorization reason code for the service.

Next Program Epoch Indicates the next program epoch number for the service.

Next Reason Code Indicates the ACP authorization reason code for the next program
epoch for the service.

201
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

SimulCrypt Status Clicking this button causes the Status–SimulCrypt SCS Program
Status window to display. Button color indicators are:
• Green — Status indicators on SimulCrypt Status window are not
in error.
• Red — A status indicator on SimulCrypt Status window is in error.
• Gray — SimulCrypt Status not applicable to highlighted row
above.

202
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — SimulCrypt SCS Program Status

This window shows the current SimulCrypt status for this encrypted program.
The overall program state is displayed, including the SCS Program Index,
Program State, and current Crypto Period Duration. The Stream State for each
ECMG that is supplying Conditional Access for this program is displayed. The
SimulCrypt SCS Program Status window is illustrated in Figure 4-74 and
defined in Table 4-59.
Figure 4-74 SimulCrypt SCS Program Status window

203
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-59 SimulCrypt Configuration — Status window field definitions

Item Definition

SCS Program Index This index is used to traverse the Program

Table. The Program Table contains SimulCrypt
encryption status information relating to this
program.

SCS Program State Displays the service state of this program:

1 — program configured, no event running.
2 — program configured, event running
normally.
3 — program not configured.

Crypto Period (Seconds) Displays the actual crypto period in seconds

that is in use for this program.

ECMG Index Read only row indicator by ECMG number.

CAS ID (Hex) The Super CAS ID of the ECMG that will be

connected to by the SimulCrypt SCS. The
SubCAS ID (Hex)
Super CAS ID is the 32-bit concatenation of
the CAS ID and the SubCAS ID. The CAS ID
identifies the conditional access provider. It
supplies the upper 16-bits of the SuperCAS ID.
The SubCAS ID identifies instances of a
provider’s ECMGs on the SimulCrypt network.
It supplies the lower 16-bits of the Super
CAS ID. Each ECM ID and SuperCAS ID
combination in the SimulCrypt system must be
globally unique.

Stream State Displays the stream state for an ECMG on

this service:
1 — Open
2 — Closed
3 — Error
4 — Not configured
5 — Invalid CAS ID

204
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Insertion Queue Table

The Insertion Queue Table lists the MPEG messages, usually PSI messages
such as PAT, PMT, and CAT that are being inserted by the SEM into an output
transport stream. Also listed are program related messages and encryption
messages such as PIT, PNT, PRK, and WKE.
The SEM performs a number of service checks prior to inserting any program
or encryption related messages (PMT, PIT, PNT,PRK, WKE). The SEM will only
insert program and encryption messages after it has successfully extracted the
input PMT message. This allows the SEM to validate the input program and
determine if the input program is pre-encrypted. This is necessary since a
program can be marked as pre-encrypted and also be marked as output
encrypted. The SEM will only encrypt programs if the input program is not
marked as pre-encrypted or is marked as pre-encrypted but is not pre-
encrypted. This prevents the SEM from encrypting a pre-encrypted input
program.
This allows the SEM to handle clear and pre-encrypted input streams. It also
allows the SEM to recognize and process changes to the input stream in cases
where an input program changes from pre-encrypted to clear or from clear to
pre-encrypted.
The Insertion Queue Table window is illustrated in Figure 4-75 and defined in
Table 4-60.
Figure 4-75 Insertion Queue Table window

205
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-60 Insertion Queue Table window field definitions

Item Definition

Output Stream Output ID index (an algorithm is used to

convert the ID to an ASI, GigE, or QAM output
stream).

Output PID PID of the message being inserted.

Msg. Type Message type of the message being inserted.

Prog. No. Program number of the message being

inserted. Program number 0 is for all
non-program related messages (those that are
inserted on ancillary subqueues).

First Inserted Time the message is first inserted. This can be

used to determine when the message was
last updated. For example, PMT messages are
updated each time the input PMT changes.
The First Inserted time can be used to
determine when the PMT message was last
updated.

SubQ ID Index of the subqueue. The subqueue ID is

used internally by the SEM. Each output PID is
associated with 1 subqueue.

Slot Slot number (relative 1). This is the internal

SEM slot number of the subqueue. Each
output message is associated with 1 slot.

Start Time Start time of the message. This is the time

that the message is inserted into the output
transport stream.

Stop Time Stop time of the message. This is the time

that the message is removed from the output
transport stream.

Seq. N0. The LOAD SEM sequence number of the

command responsible for the insert.

206
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — SEM PSI Table

The following table contains a list of messages that are either being extracted
from the SEM inputs or being inserted into the SEM outputs. All messages
extracted from SEM inputs that are being used by the SEM are displayed. For
the SEM outputs, only PATs, PMTs, PITs and CATs are displayed. These
messages were given to the SEM when it is in external mode or created by
the SEM when it is in internal mode. The SEM PSI Table window is illustrated in
Figure 4-76 and defined in Table 4-61.
Figure 4-76 SEM PSI Table window

207
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-61 SEM PSI Table window field definitions

Item Definition

Type Indicates whether this message comes from

an SEM input or output, or if the source is
unknown.

Interface Indicates the input or output interface port ID

for which this message applies.

PID Indicates the PID that contains this message.

Msg. Type Indicates the MPEG message type (in

hexadecimal format). Typical message types
are:
00 — PAT
02 — PMT
C0 — PIT

Program No. When the message is related to a program, it

indicates the program number. This value is
zero if the message is not related specifically
to a program.

Segment Indicates the segment number of this

message, which is useful for PAT messages.

Part The 1024 bytes of a message can be divided

into parts, which are indexed with this field.

Message Raw data stream of the message.

PSI Info This window shows a detailed breakdown of

all PSI messages.

208
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Hardware Error Log

This window provides a table of hardware errors that have occurred. A
maximum of 500 can be recorded. The Hardware Error Log window is
illustrated in Figure 4-77 and defined in Table 4-62.
Figure 4-77 Hardware Error Log window

Table 4-62 Hardware Error Log window field definitions

Item Definition

Index Index of hardware error table entry.

Time Logged System up time when the error was logged.

Zero indicates the error occurred at startup.

Error Code Indicates the code of the message described

in the Description field.

Error Data Applicable to errors that are issued for multiple

inputs, outputs, output transport streams, etc.
It is used to indicate the input port, output
port, or output transport stream to which the
error applies. Zero indicates the error does not
use this parameter, the SEM cannot
determine the port or stream number for the
error, or the SEM is not supporting this
parameter for the error.

Description Text description of the error.

209
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — Invalid Init Data Errors

This window provides a table of invalid initialization data errors. A maximum of
100 errors can be recorded. The Invalid Init Data Errors window is illustrated in
Figure 4-78 and defined in Table 4-63.
Figure 4-78 Invalid Initialization Data Errors window

Table 4-63 Invalid Initialization Data Errors window field definitions

Item Definition

Index Index to invalid initialization data table entry.

MIB Name Text string of the MIB variable name of the

data item or table.

Item Number Indicates to which table leaf the error pertains

when the data item is part of a table.

First Index Indicates the index value of the first index

when the data item is part of a table.

Second Index Indicates the index value of the second index

when the data item is part of a table with two
indices.

210
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Status — SEM Version and MCNs

The SEM Version and MCN windows provide version information for the
software, main board, ACP module board, and QAM-upconverter board. The
SEM Version and MCN window is illustrated in Figure 4-79 and the defined in
Table 4-64.
Figure 4-79 Version and MCN Window

211
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-64 SEM Version and MCNs window field definitions

Item Definition

Software

Host Build Date The date that all of the software was linked
into executable object code.

Host Application Version Host processor application creation date.

Host Boot Code Version Host processor boot code version.

GigE Application Version SEM Gigabit Ethernet processor application

code version.

GigE Boot Code Version SEM Gigabit Ethernet processor boot code
version.

SEM MIB Version SEM Management Information Base version.

SEM Serial Number SEM Serial Number

Main Board

MUX FPGA Version SEM MUX FPGA version.

Main Board Version SEM main board version.

Main Board Type SEM 1000, v4, and v8 use Type 1; SEM v12
uses Type 2.

ACP Board

ACP FPGA Version Identifies the field-programmable gate array

(FPGA) version of the installed ACP module.

ACP Board Version Displayed as an xx.yy string, whereby xx

indicates the PWB version and yy indicates the
BOM version.

ACP Board Type A numeric code indicating the board type of

the ACP module.

QAM and Upconverter

QAM Board MCN QAM board Module Configuration Number

(used to identify the type of module installed).

QAM Board Version QAM board version.

QAM Board Firmware Version QAM board firmware version.

Upconverter MCN MCN of the upconverter.

Upconverter Board Version Upconverter module version.

Upconverter PLD Version Upconverter module PLD version.

Reprogram ACP FPGA Clicking this button invokes the warning

pop-up illustrated in Figure 4-80.
The ACP FPGA is automatically reprogrammed
by the SEM when a new version of code is
loaded onto the SEM and the new
212
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

SEM version contains a new ACP FPGA file

image. However, certain versions of SEM code
may support one or more versions of
ACP FPGA images.
This feature, therefore, allows a user to force
the SEM to upgrade to a newer version of
ACP FPGA code. Under normal operating
conditions, it should not be necessary to
upgrade the ACP FPGA manually.
Reprogramming the ACP FPGA should only be
done when recommended by Motorola.
The reprogramming of the ACP FPGA takes
approximately 20 minutes. During this time,
the SEM will automatically reboot itself
multiple times. Caution should be taken during
this procedure to ensure that the SEM is not
powered off.

Figure 4-80 ACP FPGA reprogramming warning pop-up

213
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Host Packets Statistics — Packet Insertion Statistics

This window shows the average number of packets inserted per second, the
insertion rate, and the total number of packets inserted for a specified time
interval (for example, 5 seconds) for each interface output port by service
number (1-16). The Packet Insertion Statistics window is illustrated in
Figure 4-81 and defined in Table 4-65.
Figure 4-81 Host Packets Statistics — Packet Insertion Statistics window

214
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-65 Host Packets Statistics — Packet Insertion Statistics window field definitions
Item Definition

Output Interface Read only. It shows the output interface by

port.

Output Stream Status Summary of the possible alarms associated

with an output stream, such as:
• Output Stream Overflow
• Output Stream Threshold
• Output Stream Host IP Overflow
• QAM Fault
• Upconverter Fault
The highest current fault is indicated by each
LED. The alarm indications are as follows:
• Green — no alarm.
• Gray — cause of alarm is indeterminate.
• Yellow — warning.
• Blue — minor.
• Magenta — major.
• Red — critical.
If an LED alarm indication is active, display the
Alarm and Events window to determine which
of the above output transport stream alarms is
the cause.

Number Packets Per Second Average number of packets inserted per

second during the last monitoring.

Insertion Rate (Kbps) Insertion rates of the MPEG interface output

ports during the last monitoring.

Total Number Packets Inserted Total number of packets inserted by the MPEG
interface output ports.

215
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Packet Statistics

The aggregate amount of allowable Host IP insertion bandwidth for all
interfaces and IP ENET1-2 is 10 Mbps. For each output transport stream, the
insertion rate of Host IP data is from 0-2750 Kbps, which can be configured in
the Maximum Insertion Rate column of this window. A running total of
remaining bandwidth that is still not used is displayed at the bottom of the
window. The Host IP Packet Statistics window is illustrated in Figure 4-82 and
defined in Table 4-66.
Figure 4-82 Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Packet Statistics

216
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-66 Host IP Packet Statistics window field definitions

Item Definition

Output Interface Read only. Shows the output interface by port.

Host IP Packet Status This LED is red if the packets discarded per
second is not zero. When green, it indicates the
packets discarded per second is zero.

*Maximum Insertion Rate (Kbps) This is the only configurable column in the
window. It is used to set the maximum
insertion rate of each output interface. Each
output interface insertion rate can be from 0–
2750 Kbps, with the total of all insertion rates
not to exceed 10,000 Kbps. The SEM must be
rebooted for this change to take affect.

Packets Inserted Per Second (5 second Average number of packets inserted per
average) second during the last monitoring period
(5 seconds).

Insertion Rate (Kbps) Insertion rates of the MPEG interface output

ports.
Rate = Packets x 1504 / 1000.0

Total Number of Packets Inserted Total number of packets inserted by the MPEG
interface output ports.

Remaining Total Bandwidth The running total of remaining unused

bandwidth from the total available bandwidth of
10,000 Kbps.

*Reboot required.

217
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Input Statistics

This window shows ENET1-2: the average number of packets received per
second, the reception rate, and the total number of packets received for each
IP interface ENET1-2. It also shows the number of packets discarded per
second, the discarded data rate, and the total number of packets discarded for
each IP interface. The information displayed is sampled at a specified time
interval (for example, 5 seconds). The Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Input
Statistics window is illustrated in Figure 4-83 and defined in Table 4-67.
Figure 4-83 Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Input Statistics window

218
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-67 Host Packets Statistics — Host IP Input Statistics window field definitions
Item Definition

Input Interface ENET1 or ENET2.

MPEG Packets Received Per Second Average number of MPEG packets received
per second during the last monitoring.

Received Data Rate (Kbps) Reception rates of ENET1-2.

Total Number Received MPEG Packets Total number of MPEG packets received by
ENET1-2.

MPEG Packets Discarded Per Second The average number of packets discarded
during the last monitoring period (for example,
5 seconds) on this IP interface. Packets are
discarded when there is not enough buffer
space due to buffer overflow or incorrect
configuration.

Discarded Data Rate (Kbps) Discarded rates of ENET1-2.

Total Number Discarded MPEG Packets Total number of packets discarded that came
in on this IP interface.

219
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Packet Statistics — GigE Output Packet Statistics

The GigE Output Packet Statistics window provides information on the amount
of data received through GigE input and routed to specific output streams. The
data rates shown are based on the amount of non-null MPEG packets received
by the GigE and routed to an output stream. This number does not include PSI
insertion (PATs, PMTs, ECMs, etc.). This screen is useful to determine the
amount of MPEG data received by the GigE and routed to each output
transport stream.
The GigE Packet Counter Statistics window is illustrated in Figure 4-84 and
defined in Table 4-68.
Figure 4-84 GigE Output Packet Statistics window

220
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-68 GigE Output Packet Statistics window field definitions

Item Definition

Output Interface Read only. It shows the output interface by

transport stream number, type, and port.

Output Stream Status Summary of the possible alarms associated

with an output stream, such as:
• Output Stream Overflow
• Output Stream Threshold
• Output Stream Host IP Overflow
• QAM Fault
• Upconverter Fault
The highest current fault is indicated by each
LED. The alarm indications are as follows:
• Green — no alarm.
• Gray — cause of alarm is indeterminate.
• Yellow — warning.
• Blue — minor.
• Magenta — major.
• Red — critical.
If an LED alarm indication is active, display the
Alarm and Events window to determine which
of the above output transport stream alarms is
the cause.

Number Packets Per Second (5 Sec Avg) Number of GigE MPEG packets routed from
GigE input to an output stream in the last
second. Average is taken over the last
5 seconds.

Data Rate (Mbps)(5 sec Avg) Data rate of GigE MPEG packets routed from
GigE input to an output stream.

Total Number GigE MPEG Packets Total number of GigE MPEG packets routed
from GigE input to an output stream.

221
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Packet Statistics — GigE Frame Counter Statistics

The GigE Frame Counter Statistics window provides five second interval and
total frame counter statistics. The GigE Frame Counter Statistics window is
illustrated in Figure 4-85 and defined in Table 4-69.
Figure 4-85 GigE Frame Counter Statistics window

222
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-69 GigE Frame Counter Statistics window field definitions

Item Definition

Current Number Of Opened The number of UDP ports currently opened.

UDP Boards

Singlecast Frame Received Last 5 Secs — number of singlecast frames received during
the last status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of singlecast frames received since last
reset.

Multicast Frames Received Last 5 Secs — number of multicast frames received during
the last status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of multicast frames received since last
reset.

Broadcast Frames Received Last 5 Secs — number of broadcast frames received during
the last status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of broadcast frames received since last
reset.

Error Frames Received Last 5 Secs — number of error frames received during the
last status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of error frames received since last
reset.

Total Frames Received Last 5 Secs — number of frames received during the last
status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of frames received since last reset.

Received Data Rate (Mbps) Received date rate in Mbps during the last status checking
interval, which is five seconds.

Good Frames Transmitted Last 5 Secs — number of good frames transmitted during
the last status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of good frames transmitted since last
reset.

Error Frames Transmitted Last 5 Secs — number of error frames transmitted during the
last status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of error frames transmitted since last
reset.

Total Frames Transmitted Last 5 Secs — number of frames transmitted during the last
status checking interval, which is five seconds.
Total — total number of frames transmitted since last reset.

Transmitted Data Rate Transmitted date rate in Mbps during the last status checking
(Mbps) interval, which is five seconds.

223
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Packet Statistics — GigE Frame Buffer Status

The GigE Frame Buffer Status window shows information on the current GigE
frame level and input data rates. The window also logs the maximum values
from the last twenty-four hours.
The SEM uses the GigE frame buffer to hold frames while its dejittering
algorithm performs time based recovery. This algorithm attempts to correct the
timing errors on the incoming MPEG streams, principally caused by the
following factors:
• PCR (program clock reference) jitter
• Clock skew (the relative difference in clock accuracy of devices in the
processing chain that either creates or alters the PCRs)
• Network jitter
The dejittering algorithm will attempt to determine the intended rate of the
incoming transport stream. The GigE then will dejitter this stream and make the
necessary PCR corrections in the stream before it is transmitted as an output
stream. The dejittering algorithm uses incoming PCRs as a variable in the
calculation of the intended incoming stream rate. If incoming PCRs are
incorrect, the dejittering algorithm will calculate the wrong stream rate, and the
associated frames will be taken out of the buffer at the wrong rate.
The frame buffer status window allows a user to view the overall GigE frame
level and total input data rate. A frame buffer level is maintained for each UDP
port opened, however only the highest frame buffer level is displayed. The
frame buffer status is displayed in milliseconds. This is the amount of time that
a buffer will hold onto a received GigE frame. The maximum level is the time in
milliseconds that if exceeded, will cause the GigE buffers to overflow. The
frame buffer is adjustable by the user based on the jitter absorption setting and
the input data rate setting. These two settings allow the SEM to define an
initial buffer level. The initial buffer level is designed to prevent under runs as
well as be low enough to prevent frame buffer overflows
The default configuration settings have been carefully selected to prevent both
under runs and overflows of the GigE frame buffers. It is highly recommended
that these settings not be changed.

224
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

The GigE Frame Buffer Status window is illustrated in Figure 4-86 and defined
in Table 4-70.
Figure 4-86 GigE Frame Buffer Status Window

225
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-70 GigE Frame Buffer Status Table

Item Description

Index Each index represents one hour. The current hour is stored at index
1. New hours are inserted at the top of the table and all previous
hours move down one row.

Interface: UDP Port The GigE interface and UDP port that experienced the highest buffer
level for the hour.

Max Level (ms) The maximum GigE frame buffer level (in milliseconds) recorded for
the hour.

Max Fullness The maximum GigE frame buffer level (as a percentage of Buffer
Overflow Level) recorded for the hour.

Max Full GPS Time The GPS time when this table entry was last updated.

Overflows The number of GigE frame buffer overflows recorded for the hour.
The count of overflows is calculated based on the actual input data
rate and the configured buffer level. It is assumed that if the input
data rate exceeds the calculated buffer level, then the input has
overflowed one or more GigE buffers.
The SEM is designed to reset a GigE frame buffer prior to
overflowing. The maximum input data rate and jitter absorption
settings are used to calculate the size of the GigE frame buffers.
If an overflow occurs prior to a reset, then the SEM has been
incorrectly configured (input data rate and jitter absorption setting are
incorrect). In addition, it indicates that the SEM is most likely
receiving more input data than the maximum recommended rate
(1.24Gbps).

Resets The number of frame buffer resets reported by the GigE processor
for the hour. A reset of a buffer indicates that a number of GigE
frames have been dropped (tiling or glitching will most likely be
seen). The tiling or glitching should only be momentary, as it will take
some time before the GigE buffers could become full enough to
reset.
Resets of the GigE frame buffers are not normal and indicate the
SEM is incorrectly configured and/or the input data rate exceeds the
maximum recommended rate. Additionally, erratic or incorrect PCR
values may also cause resets (due to forcing the SEM to increase the
buffer level based on the incorrect PCR values).

Buffer Overflow Level The point at which the GigE frame buffer will overflow (in
(ms) milliseconds). This value is based on the number of received frames
per second for all interfaces.

Current Buffer Level Current highest GigE frame buffer level (in milliseconds).
(ms)

Current Buffer Level Current highest GigE frame buffer level as a percentage of Buffer
Fullness (%) Overflow Level.

Frame Buffer Alarm User defined threshold representing a percentage of Buffer Overflow
Threshold (%) level. If this threshold is exceeded, a Gigabit Ethernet Frame Buffer
Fullness alarm will be issued.

Actual Input Data Gigabit Ethernet MPEG input data rate in Mbps. This is the total
226
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Description

Rate (Mbps) amount of MPEG data currently being received by all Gigabit Ethernet
interfaces.

Maximum Input Data Maximum Gigabit Ethernet MPEG input data rate in Mbps. This is the
Rate (Mbps) total amount of MPEG data expected to be received by all Gigabit
Ethernet interfaces. This data rate is used to determine the Reset
Buffer Level Limit. The Maximum Input Data Rate should always be
set equal to or greater than the Actual Input Data Rate. The Jitter
Absorption setting can limit the valid range of this data rate.
It is highly recommended that this setting not be changed (even if
the actual input data rate is expected to be lower than the default
setting). The default setting of 1.24Gbps is the maximum
recommended data rate for all GigE inputs. Exceeding this rate may
cause the GigE frame buffers to overflow or reset, resulting in
dropped packets (glitching/tiling).

Reset Buffer Level The level at which the GigE frame buffer will be reset (in
Limit (ms) milliseconds). This value is based on the Maximum Input Data Rate.
The SEM calculates this level using the input data rate and the total
number of GigE frame buffers. This limit is calculated to force a reset
to prevent a GigE frame buffer overflow. A reset of the GigE frame
buffers will result in a momentary glitch, however this is preferred
instead of a buffer overflow. An overflow will cause glitching until the
level drops or the buffer is reset.
In normal operation, it is expected that this level will never be
reached or exceeded. Exceeding this level indicates that the SEM is
either incorrectly configured (incorrect jitter absorption and/or input
data rate) and/or the input to the SEM exceeds the maximum
recommended data rate.

Frame Buffer Fullness Major — Current Buffer Level Fullness has exceeded Frame Buffer
Alarm Alarm Threshold.
Critical — Current Buffer Level has exceeded Buffer Overflow Level.

227
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Routing Table Status

Clicking the Routing Status button on the SEM Input/Output Configuration—
Gigabit Ethernet window causes the GigE Routing Table Status window to be
displayed.
This status window shows the status of all SEM GigE routes, including static
routes. The GigE Routing Table Status window is illustrated in Figure 4-87 and
defined in Table 4-71.
Figure 4-87 GigE Routing Table Status window

228
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-71 GigE Routing Table Status window field definitions

Item Definition

Network IP The GigE Ethernet routing destination network IP address.

Subnet Mask When masking is employed, it indicates the network address

and host ID portion of the IP address.

Gateway IP The GigE Ethernet routing destination gateway IP address.

GigE Port Indicates GigE1 or GigE2, as applicable to the route.

Routing Flags Routing Flags are:

• Not Applicable
• Network Route
• Host Route
• Default Route
• Interface Route

229
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE ARP Table Status

Clicking the ARP Status button on the SEM Input/Output Configuration–Gigabit
Ethernet window causes the GigE ARP Table Status window to display.
This window shows the ARP Flags status of device ARPs entered on the GigE
Static ARP Table Configuration window. The GigE ARP Table Status window is
illustrated in Figure 4-88 and defined in Table 4-72.
Figure 4-88 GigE ARP Table Status window

230
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-72 GigE ARP Table Status window field definitions

Item Definition

ARP Cache Entry Timeout The minimum value is one second. If within the specified period, no ARP
reply is received, the ARP table entry expires and is removed from the
table. This does not apply to entries in the GigE ARP Table Configuration
window, which are static. Dynamic ARP entries associated with output
transport streams will not expire unless explicitly allowed by setting
Enable Output TS ARP Entry Timeout. This value must be greater than
the ARP Retry Interval. This parameter takes immediate effect; however,
it must be applied to persist through subsequent reboots.

ARP Retry Interval Dynamic ARP Entry Retry Interval in seconds. The minimum value is one
second. The SEM sends an ARP request and retries twice at
500 millisecond intervals if a response is not received. After these two
retries, the SEM will retry at the user-configured interval. Once written,
the change to this parameter takes immediate effect. However, for the
change to persist through subsequent reboots or power cycles, the
change must be applied.

Enable Output TS ARP Entry Enabling (check mark) allows Dynamic ARP entries associated with
Timeout output transport streams to be treated like other dynamic ARPs and
expire based on ARP timeout configuration settings.

IP Address IP address of GigE target device on network.

MAC Address MAC address of GigE target device on network.

GigE Port Indicates GigE-1, GigE-2, or GigE-3.

ARP Flags ARP flags are:

• Not Applicable
• ARPing
• ARP Done
• ARP Static
Flush Clicking Flush removes all Dynamic ARP entries from the table. Static
entries are not removed. Static ARP entries configured in GigE Static
ARP Table must be explicitly removed by zeroing the applicable fields and
clicking Apply. The time to complete the flush can take many seconds, as
determined by the SEM processor load.

Update The table is updated approximately every 60 seconds. When Update is

clicked, the SEM immediately updates the table and resets the timer.
The time to complete the update can take many seconds, as determined
by the SEM processor load.

231
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

GigE Loop Through Terminator Status

Clicking the GigE LT Terminator Status button on the SEM Input/Output
Configuration — Gigabit Ethernet window causes the Gigabit Ethernet
Multicast Configuration window to display.
This window contains the MAC addresses of each SEM configured in a daisy
chain. It is applicable only to the Loop Through terminator, which is the last
SEM in a daisy chain. The GigE Loop Through Terminator Status window is
illustrated in Figure 4-89 and defined in Table 4-73.
Figure 4-89 GigE Loop Through Terminator Status window

232
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Table 4-73 GigE Loop Through Terminator Status window field definitions
Item Definition

Index Identifies the window line item. Sixteen GigE-1 – GigE-2 loop through
pairs can be listed in the window.

MAC Address The MAC address of each GigE-1 and GigE-2 in the loop through pair.

233
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

ISA SDV Sessions

Figure 4-90 ISA SDV Sessions Window

Table 4-74 ISA SDV Sessions window field definitions

Item Definition

GigE Port The Gigabit Ethernet physical port on which packets are being
received.

UDP The Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Port (range is 0 to 65535).

Multicast IP The Gigabit Ethernet Receive Multicast IP Address.

Source IP The Gigabit Ethernet IGMP v3 Source IP Address. This is the

source IP when IGMP v3 is supported.

In Pgm The Gigabit Ethernet Input Program Number. A value of zero (0)
indicates that the input is an SPTS and the first program listed in
the input PAT will be mapped by the SEM.

Out Pgm The Output Program Number (1 - 65535).

TS:QAM The Output Transport Stream number (1-16) and Output QAM Port
(1-8 v8, 1-12 v12).

BW(Mbps) The Expected Program Bandwidth (bps). This is the bandwidth of

the program as defined in the service mapping. A value of 0
indicates that the program BW is unknown.

Type The Type of session (SDV or VOD/BC).

Manager IP The IP address of the SDV, VOD, or Broadcast manager sending

session commands.

234
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

Session ID Session IDs are stored as 3 4-byte words.

Session ID is broken up as follows:
Word 1: 00:01 = 0x0000 (unused)
Word 1: 02:03 = 1st 2 bytes of session ID (1st 2 bytes of MAC
address)
Word 2: 00:03 = Next 4 bytes (these 4 plus 1st 2 are the MAC
address of manager)
Word 3: 00:03 = Last 4 bytes (unique number assigned by
manager)

ISA SDV GigE Port Indicates which Gigabit Ethernet Interface port to use for ISA SDV
mappings.

Data Carousel Program Number Indicates which Input Program Number to use for the Data
Carousel.

235
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

ISA SDV GigE UDP Status

Figure 4-91 ISA SDV GigE UDP Status Window

Table 4-75 ISA SDV GigE UDP Status Window field definitions
Item Definition

GigE Interface The Gigabit Ethernet physical port on which packets are being
received.

UDP Port The Gigabit Ethernet Input UDP Port (range is 0 to 65535).

Multicast IP The Gigabit Ethernet Receive Multicast IP Address.

Source IP The Gigabit Ethernet IGMP v3 Source IP Address. This is the

source IP when IGMP v3 is supported.

Current The current data rate in Mbps over the sampling period.

Average The average data rate in Mbps over the sampling period.

Minimum The minimum data rate in Mbps over the sampling period.

Peak The peak data rate in Mbps over the sampling period.

High Bit Rate Alarm Status This alarm is used to inform the user when one or more Gigabit
Ethernet Input Streams have a high bit rate condition.

236
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

ISA SDV QAM

Figure 4-92 ISA SDV QAM Window

Table 4-76 ISA SDV QAM Window field definitions

Item Definition

Transport Stream Index The Output Transport Stream Number of the QAM Port.

QAM Port QAM Port assigned to this Output Transport Stream.

Number VOD/BC Sessions The Number of VOD/Broadcast sessions on this QAM Port. This
is the number of VOD/Broadcast sessions active on a QAM
Port. Since VOD and Broadcast sessions are not required to be
reserved for an output, this is the count of active VOD and
Broadcast sessions on a specific QAM.

Number Reserved The Number of reserved SDV sessions on this QAM Port. This
is the number of SDV sessions that have been reserved by the
manager. Each SDV session requires that a manager reserve a
QAM. This is the count of SDV sessions reserved (not the
actual number of active SDV sessions).

QAM BW Reserved (Mbps) The Group BW for SDV sessions (not used for VOD/Broadcast
sessions). This is the total amount of BW allocated for all SDV
sessions on a Port. The total SDV BW for a port is defined by
the session manager. The manager reserves this BW for future
SDV sessions. This is not the BW of current active SDV

237
4 SETUP AND OPERATION

Item Definition

sessions, but the total BW reserved by the manager for SDV

sessions.

Status — Save Entire SEM Status

Saves all of the status to a status.txt file, which is located in the same directory
as the semem.jar file. The Save SEM Status window is illustrated in
Figure 4-93.
Figure 4-93 Save SEM Status window

238
5 SEM VERIFICATION
The following is a simple and quick verification procedure to determine if the SEM is
operating properly. Verification requires using the SEM-EM.
1. Verify the correct version of the SEM is loaded from the Status > SEM Version
and MCNs window.
2. Verify all alarms are green. Select Status > Alarms and Events.
• For critical alarms (red), select Status > Hardware Error Log to show more
detail. If the alarm is due to input failure, verify Input Active Status as
described below.
• For major alarms (magenta), this is usually a service error and is only
applicable when configured through an external controller.
• For all other alarms, verify the alarm type. If Invalid Init Data alarm, use the
Status > Invalid Init Data Errors window to show more detail. These errors
indicate the SEM was not configured properly. Other alarms may indicate an
output overflow condition.
3. Verify all enabled ASI inputs have green LED indicators from the Configuration >
SEM Input/Output Configuration > ASI Ports tab.
4. Verify all enabled ASI outputs have yellow LED indicators (may look orange
depending on PC) from the Configuration > SEM Input/Output Configuration >
ASI Ports tab.
5. Verify GigE status from the Configuration > SEM Input/Output Configuration >
Gigabit Ethernet tab. Ensure all enabled GigE inputs have green LED indicators.
GigE LEDs on the front panel should be flashing green to indicate link status is
good. Fast flashing green indicates SEM is receiving data.
6. From the Configuration > SEM Input/Output Configuration > Gigabit Ethernet
tab, verify GigE network configuration. Ensure the GigE IP Address, Subnet
Mask, and all other configuration parameters are correctly set.
7. Verify output program status from the Status > Output Program Status window.
Ensure all mapped programs are displayed and showing Successful
Remultiplexing. All GigE inputs will list the input UDP port (verify port is correct
and corresponds to expected configuration).
This status window is not updated real time. If the program is successfully
mapped, then the input is removed; however, the window will still indicate a
“Successful — Remapping Program” to show that at one point, the input
program was remapped.
8. Verify the output data rate from the Status > Output Transport Utilization window.
Ensure that for each output, the data rate is as expected. Transport stream
monitoring can be enabled or disabled for any output transport stream without
having to reboot the SEM. It is highly recommended that all output transport
streams have monitoring enabled.
239
5 SEM VERIFICATION

9. Verify GigE packet statistics from the Status > GigE Packet Counter Statistics
window. Ensure that GigE packet counter statistics show the expected packet
counts. Also, ensure the number of opened UDP ports shown is correct.
10. Verify QAM status from the Configuration > QAM Configuration and Up-
Converter window. For QAM outputs, verify Modulator Status is Normal. Verify
Mute selection is Un-muted for each QAM output in use.
11. As applicable, verify Manual Routing, ASI Demultiplexing, UDP Port Mapping, or
8 Channel UDP Port Mapping configuration settings. The four windows are:
• VOD Control > Manual Routing window
• VOD Control > ASI Demultiplexing window
• VOD Control > UDP Mapping window
• VOD Control > 8 Channel UDP Mapping window
When the SEM is configured for one of the above modes, verify as applicable,
the following configuration settings:
• If input is pre-encrypted, that the Input Program Pre-Encrypted check box is
checked.
• The Starting Program Number (starting program number of the output
stream).
• The Number Programs.
• That the GigE interface configuration is correct (correct GigE interface port is
selected).
The Save Entire SEM Status does a complete MIB walk. A text file is created
containing all SEM configuration and status items. This file can then be used by
Motorola personnel to further diagnose any SEM problems.

240
6 TROUBLESHOOTING
This section provides information to isolate and resolve possible error conditions
common to all SEM devices. In addition, it provides maintenance recommendations
if a fault indicator LED lights or if unit fails to power up.
If the error does not preclude activating the SEM-EM, perform the procedural checks
provided in Section 5, “SEM Verification” before implementing the corrective actions
provided in this section.
If you need assistance, contact the Motorola Technical Response Center (TRC):
• Inside the U.S.A.: 1-888-944-HELP (1-888-944-4357)
• Outside the U.S.A.: 1-215-323-0044
• Online: http://businessonline.motorola.com
The TRC is on call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. In addition, Motorola Online offers
a searchable solutions database, technical documentation, and low-priority issue
creation and tracking.

SEM LED/Error Indications

Table 6-1 contains data for quickly resolving problems you may encounter using the
SEM:

Table 6-1 SEM LED/Error Conditions

LED/Error Possible Cause or Indication Corrective Action
Condition

Status LED not No power or faulty LED. No power connection - check;

illuminated faulty power supply - replace.
Status LED solid Missing Time Update - SEM did not receive a Validate time source from
yellow (warning time update for more than 600 seconds external server.
or minor alarm) (10 minutes).

Command Table Empty - the Command Table When externally controlled, specifically
is empty (there are no commands that are in a broadcast environment, the SEM
waiting to be started). It is set 60 seconds is typically loaded with 24 to 48 hours
after the first time update is received and the of future programming. Verify external
command table is empty. Not applicable when controller connection to SEM.
the SEM is internally controlled.
Command Table Near Full - the Command When externally controlled, specifically
Table is near or 100% full. A check of the in a broadcast environment, the SEM
maximum number of commands relative to is typically loaded with 24 to 48 hours
available NVRAM storage. The SEM can of future programming. Do not load
handle 10000 commands and 23000 blocks more commands to the SEM until
(64 bytes per block) of NVRAM storage. existing commands are executed.
Not applicable when the SEM is
internally controlled.

241
6 TROUBLESHOOTING

LED/Error Possible Cause or Indication Corrective Action

Condition

Status LED solid Invalid Initialization Data — invalid initialization Look at the Invalid Initialization Data
yellow (warning data was encountered in the config.ini or Errors table to determine which data is
or minor alarm) mancfg.ini at system startup. incorrect. Change to a valid
(cont) configuration.
Output Utilization Fault — the data rate Reduce the amount of services to the
specified for the output transport stream output transport stream.
exceeded the limit.

Gige Redundancy Threshold Exceeded — the Verify GigE connections and server
threshold was exceeded on the in-use GigE status.
port. Only applicable when the GigE is in
redundant mode.

GigE Redundancy Fail Over Fault — the Verify GigE connections and server
threshold was exceeded on the in-use GigE status.
port and a fail over to the other GigE port
occurred. Only applicable when the GigE is in
redundant mode.

Status LED solid Zero System Time — SEM did not receive a Verify time source is active and
Red (major or time update since the last reboot. It is set 70 supplying time to the SEM.
critical alarm) seconds after the SEM is rebooted if the SEM
did not receive an update within that
time interval.

Service In Error — Indicates a service Verify input connections and service is

command is currently in error (unable to fully present and content is supported by
continue processing). The alarm is set after SEM.
one or more service commands is in error for
more than 60 seconds. Not applicable when
the SEM is internally controlled.

Waiting for Extracted Message — one or more Verify input connections and service is
commands are waiting more than 60 seconds present.
for an extracted message (PAT, PMT). This
alarm is cleared after all commands waiting for
extracted messages received all of
the messages.

Service Not Authorized — one or more Typically occurs when the SEM did not
services that are supposed to be fully receive the entire proper encryption
encrypted are not authorized. Authorized message (for example, PRK message)
status is based on the status reports from the required to encrypt the program. Verify
ACP (full command state and external controller
encryption only). connection to SEM.
Physical Input Failure — one or more physical Physical input interfaces can be
interfaces that are configured as enabled to disabled to prevent this alarm when no
receive input have a failure. input is connected.
Temperature Fault — temperature of the SEM Check that the front air inlets are
exceeded the maximum allowed for three or not blocked.
more consecutive reads. Check that the fan outlets are
not blocked.
Check that the rack ambient
temperature is within specifications.
242
6 TROUBLESHOOTING

LED/Error Possible Cause or Indication Corrective Action

Condition

Check fan operation. If failure is noted,

replace fan (see Appendix D, “Fan
Field Replacement Procedure”).

Status LED solid Fan Fault — one or more fans dropped below Check fans; see Appendix D, “Fan
Red (major or the allowed RPM level. Field Replacement Procedure” to
critical alarm) replace failing fan.
(cont)

Loss of input — loss of the SPTS or MPTS Inspect and secure the connectors to
that are configured for the current window of the input ports.
time.

Hardware Failure - host processor detected a Replace SEM.

problem with the ACP module, QAM module,
or GigE processor.

Output buffer overflow — the aggregate Reduce the input rate of the SEM by
information rate of the input services/PID removing one or more programs or
streams being routed to the output transport increase the alarm threshold.
stream exceeds the configured output
information rate.
Load_SEM Command Failure - unable to Verify external controller connection
process received Load SEM commands to SEM.
because they are invalid/unknown, or the
command queues are full/empty.
Program Queue containing Load SEM When externally controlled, specifically
commands has less than the Threshold in a broadcast environment, the SEM
number of commands. is typically loaded with 24 to 48 hours
of future programming. Verify external
controller connection to SEM.
Simulcrypt Communication — An ECMG has Consult Simulcrypt Configuration
failed to communicate ECM messages to the screen and verify ECMG connection
SEM for longer than the configured ECMG status. If ECMG is not currently
Response Timeout period. Only applicable connected, verify external ECMG
when the SEM is configured for "Simulcrypt 1" connections and ECMG operational
Operating Mode. status.

GigE1-3 LEDs Faulty or failed optical interface. Replace optical interface module.
solid red

ENET1-2 LEDS Collision detected (if in half-duplex mode, Duplicate IP addresses may be
alternating 10/100Base-T only). LED activates for on network.
green-yellow 100 msec after detection of collision. During
high collisions LED alternates green-yellow.

SEM powers up BOOTP/TFTP configuration. Check the BOOTP configuration and all
but fails to file paths and names on the server.
initialize Flash memory corrupted.
Reload memory from the
BOOTP server.

BOOTP BOOTP reply not received. Verify that the MAC address is correct.
unsuccessful Verify Ethernet connectivity.

243
APPENDIX A — SPECIFICATIONS

Physical Dimensions
Dimensions*
Overall depth from
front panel to end of
fan studs 18.2 inches (47 cm)
Depth from
mounting ears to
end of fan studs 17.3 inches (44 cm)
Depth from
mounting ears to 16 inches (41 cm)
rear panel
Width 17 inches (44 cm)
Height 1.75 inches (45 mm)
Approximate Weight 12 lbs (5.44 Kgs)
Mounting Rack mount
*Required rack depth is 18.5 inches (47 cm). Depth from SEM mounting ears to end
of fan studs is 17.3 inches (44 cm), which provides 1.2 inches (3 cm) air-flow space.
Cable radius space is 2.5 inches (6 cm), as the cables connect to the rear panel,
which is 16 inches (41 cm) from the mounting ears.

Electrical Specifications for AC Input

Voltage, AC 100 through 240 Vac
Line frequency, AC 50 through 60 Hz
Power (@ 115 VAC)
SEM with GbE, ASI,
ACP Board
Typical 97 W
Maximum 121 W
SEM with GbE, ASI,
ACP Board,
QAM/Upconverter
Typical 157 W
Maximum 202 W

245
APPENDIX A — SPECIFICATIONS

Rear panel alarm

contactor
Maximum switching 30 V (AC or DC)
voltage
Maximum carry 0.5 A (AC or DC)
current

Contact rating 3 W maximum

Electrical Specifications for DC Input

Voltage, DC −40 through −60 Vdc
Nominal DC −48 Vdc
Power (@ −48 Vdc)
SEM with GbE, ASI,
ACP Board
Typical 97 W
Maximum 121 W
SEM with GbE, ASI,
ACP Board,
QAM/Upconverter
Typical 157 W
Maximum 202 W
Rear panel alarm
contactor
Maximum switching 30 V (AC or DC)
voltage
Maximum carry 0.5 A (AC or DC)
current
Contact rating 3 W maximum

Operating Environment
Ambient temperature 0 to +40 °C
Operating humidity 5% to 90% Relative Humidity (non-condensing)
Storage temperature −40 to +70 °C
Cooling Three fans
Altitude −200 feet to 10,000 feet

246
APPENDIX A — SPECIFICATIONS

The SEM is capable of receiving an aggregate input information rate of up to 900

Mbps across all of its inputs and producing an aggregate output information rate of
up to 900 Mbps across all of its outputs for an aggregate throughput of 1.8 Gbps.

ASI Interface
MPEG input ASI rear panel BNC connector
ASI impedance 75 Ohms
ASI data rate:
Line rate 270 Mbps
Input data rate Variable: 50 kbps to 213 Mbps
Output data rate Variable: 1 Mbps to 206 Mbps
Input format Input packet length of 188 or 204 bytes, auto sensing;
supports packet and interleaved or burst mode
Output format 188 mode only, supports interleaved (less than 60 Mbps)
or
burst (greater than 60 Mbps) mode only
Voltage range 200 mVpp to 880 mVpp (input); 800 mVpp ±10% (output)

OAM&P and IP Data 10/100Base-T Ethernet Interfaces

Network data rate 10/100 Mbps maximum
Interface IEEE 802.3
Impedance 120 Ohms
Cable Shielded twisted pair
Connector RJ-45
Application Protocols* UDP, TCP/IP, ICMP, ARP, IGMP, SNMP, DHCP, BOOTP,
TFTP, SNTP, HTTP, Auto negotiation full and half duplex
modes
*IP data supports a subset of these protocols.

GigE Interface
Wavelengths are: 850 nm, 1310 nm, and 1550 nm.

247
APPENDIX A — SPECIFICATIONS

RF Interface (Optional QAM-UC Module)

QAM frequency range 91 MHz to 861 MHz
Carrier frequency step size 1 kHz
Carrier frequency accuracy ± 5 ppm
Channel spacing 6 to 8 MHz
Symbol rate
DCII 64 QAM 5.056942 Msym/sec
DCII 256 QAM 5.360537 Msym/sec
DVB 0.8 to 7 Msym/sec
QAM carriers per output Four outputs, each RF output contains two adjacent QAM
channels (2x4)
Output level adjustment +45 dBmV to +58 dBmV dual QAM channels
range +45 dBmV to +61 dBmV single QAM channel
Output level step size 0.5 dB
Output impedance 75 Ohms
Output return loss >14 dB
QAM constellations 64 QAM or 256 QAM
QAM FEC encoding modes ITU-T J.83 Annex A, B, C
MER equalized >41 dB
Phase noise at 10 kHz (SSB) < −96 dBc/Hz
DSB phase noise integrated
1 kHz to 10 kHz < −35 dBc
10 kHz to 50 kHz < −54 dBc
50 kHz to 3 MHz < −56 dBc

248
APPENDIX A — SPECIFICATIONS

The Alpha values for Annex A, B, and C are as follows:

FEC Mode Modulation Alpha Ch Spacing/ Typical Ch Typical
Mode Symbol Spacing Symbol
Rate Rate
Annex A DV 64 QAM 15% 1.15 8 MHz <6.952 Msps
B
Annex A DV 256 QAM 15% 1.15 8 MHz <6.952 Msps
B
Annex B DC 64 QAM 18% 1.18 6 MHz 5.06 Msps
II
Annex B DC 256 QAM 12% 1.12 6 MHz 5.36 Msps
II
Annex C* 64 QAM 12% 1.12 6 MHz <5.31 Msps
Annex C* 256 QAM 12% 1.12 6 MHz <5.31 Msps

*Annex C specifies Alpha = 13%. The SEM utilizes 12% for Annex C, which results
in a QAM signal skirt bandwidth that is slightly below the normal value for Annex C.

249
APPENDIX B — CABLING SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVED SFP
TRANSCEIVER VENDORS
This appendix provides 10Base-T, 100Base-T, RS-232, and RF cabling specifications.
Also provided is a list of approved vendors for the GigE Small Form-Factor Pluggable
(SFP) transceivers.

Ethernet 10/100Base-T Interface Cabling

Connector type RJ-45 connector
Cable type Shielded Twisted Pair CAT5
Maximum cable 300 feet
length

Table B-1 Ethernet 10Base-T interface connector pin-out

Pin Number Signal Direction Description

1 TX+ out transmit data +

2 TX− out transmit data −

3 RX+ in receive data +

4 and 5 n/c no connection

6 RX− in receive data −

7 and 8 n/c no connection

CAUTION! To comply with applicable Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

standards, high-quality shielded twisted pair cable must be used.

RS-232 Interface Cabling

Connector type DB9 male shielded connector with screw locks
Cable type 9 conductor shielded

251
APPENDIX B — CABLING SPECIFICATIONS AND APPROVED SFP TRANSCEIVER VENDORS

Table B-2 RS-232 interface connector pin-out

Pin Number Signal Direction Description

2 TX Out Transmit data

3 RX In Receive data

5 Ground Ground Ground

1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 Not connected

RF Cabling
Connector type F-type
Cable type CommScope F59 HEC T/CU Headend Cable or
equivalent
75 Ohm 100% shielded coax cable

Certified SEM V8 SFP Transceiver Vendors

The GigE requires SFP transceivers. The SEM V8 is product– and certification–
approved based on the following Multi-Source Agreement (MSA) compliant SFP
transceiver vendors:
Type Description Supplier Supplier Motorola Connector
Part Number Part Number
Optical 850nm SX, Avago Technologies HFBR-5710L N/A LC
RoHS
Finisar FTLF8519P2BNL N/A
Finisar N/A 551742-002-00
Optical 1310nm LX, Avago Technologies HFCT-5710LZ N/A LC
RoHS
Finisar FTRJ1319P1BTL N/A
Avago N/A 551746-001-00
Optical 1550nm ZX, OCP TRP-G1H7BC550 N/A LC
RoHS
OCP N/A 551762-001-00
Copper 1000bT, Methode Electronics DM7041-L N/A RJ-45
RoHS
Methode Electronics N/A 551771-001-00

Note: Items with a Motorola part number are orderable directly from Motorola.
Items that do not have a Motorola part number are supported but must be ordered
direct from the SFP manufacturer (supplier part number provided).

252
APPENDIX C — INITIALIZATION INFORMATION
On power-up or reset, the SEM undergoes an automatic initialization process during
which it loads the executable software and parameter settings that control its
operation. The SEM performs initialization either by self-booting from internal
non-volatile memory or externally booting from another device. External initialization
is performed by downloading information from a LAN connected BOOTP or DHCP
server. Some initialization information can also be loaded externally from a device
connected to the SEM front panel RS-232 interface (see Appendix E, "RS-232
Test/Console Port").
Self-boot SEM initialization enables it to operate:
• Without connecting it to the headend LAN
• In a headend LAN that does not include a BOOTP or DHCP server
External SEM initialization enables it to:
• Modify the setup of an installed SEM to accommodate system configuration
changes
• Load upgraded executable software into an installed SEM

Self-Boot Initialization
The SEM begins initialization by determining the type of boot operation (BOOTP or
DHCP) and by broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests over its ENET1 Ethernet port.
Self-boot initialization occurs when the SEM times out waiting for a reply and then
initializes itself from the information stored in its non-volatile memory.

External Initialization from a LAN Resident BOOTP or DHCP Server

For external initialization to occur from a BOOTP or DHCP server:
• The SEM must be connected to the system Ethernet LAN on ENET1
• A BOOTP or DHCP server must be present on the LAN
• The BOOTP or DHCP server must have the SEM MAC address
The SEM begins initialization by broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests over its
ENET1 Ethernet port. The BOOTP or DHCP server receives the SEM BOOTP or
DHCP requests and provides a BOOTP or DHCP response packet containing the
assigned IP addresses and bootfile entries, from which the SEM initializes itself. The
response packet may also contain a gateway if the BOOTP server is on a different
network segment than the SEM Ethernet interface.
On receipt of the BOOTP or DHCP reply, the SEM obtains the FOF filename
(sem1000.fof) and path. It then downloads it from the BOOTP or DHCP server. The
SEM then parses the FOF and compares the listed source files in the FOF with
those maintained in the SEM local copy of the previously used version. If any listed
source filename or path has changed, or if there is a force download flag for any
253
APPENDIX C — INITIALIZATION INFORMATION

listed files (an “F” at the end of the line listing the file), the listed file is then
downloaded to the SEM. If a downloaded FOF and the SEM local copy are the same
and a force download flag does not exist in that FOF, the SEM does not download
any additional files. It continues booting using the values stored in non-volatile
memory.
An FOF and other downloaded files are transferred through Trivial File Transfer
Protocol (TFTP).
Initialization is complete when the SEM finishes loading the executable software and
operating parameters, either from a new download or from memory.
The SEM can be configured to use DHCP, BOOTP, DHCP followed by BOOTP, or no
DHCP or BOOTP request. Typically, the SEM is configured to perform a BOOTP
request (factory default). If a DHCP server is to be used, the SEM should be
configured to boot using a DHCP server; however, almost all DHCP servers support
BOOTP requests. When configured to use DHCP followed by BOOTP, the SEM will
first issue a DHCP request. After 10 seconds, if a DHCP reply is not received, it will
issue a BOOTP request.
When configured to not issue a DHCP or BOOTP request, the SEM must already
contain all files it needs in non-volatile memory. It is recommended to only configure
the SEM in this manner after it has been initially installed and loaded. Configuring
the SEM to not issue a DHCP or BOOTP request will eliminate the chance that on a
reboot, the SEM will download an unwanted configuration file. This typically occurs
when a user has added a Force flag to a line in the file-of-files and has forgotten to
remove the Force flag. Additionally, the SEM will reboot approximately 10 seconds
faster.
The BOOTP and DHCP request, BOOTP and DHCP reply, and FOF transfer all use
UDP, which does not include error checking. During the download process,
undetected transmission errors can cause initialization failure. Always retry the
initialization at least once before searching for a specific fault.

254
APPENDIX C — INITIALIZATION INFORMATION

BOOTP Request and Reply Format

BOOTP request and reply messages use the same packet format. The BOOTP
packet includes multiple fields divided into the following areas:
Standard Area Contains fields for specifying basic
BOOTP message information, including
• Message type (request or reply)
• MAC address of requesting device
• IP address assignment of requesting
device
• Boot file name for the requesting
device
• Values for some standard fields must
be specified and others are optional,
depending on whether the BOOTP
message is a request or reply
Vendor-Specific Area Contains fields for use as defined by the
vendor for example, to set values for
operating parameters

BOOTP Request
In the BOOTP request, the SEM includes:
• A value indicating that the message is a BOOTP request
• A MAC address
The BOOTP request is transferred using UDP.

BOOTP Server Reply

In the BOOTP reply to the SEM, the BOOTP server includes:
• A value indicating that the message is a BOOTP reply
• The IP address of the boot server
• The IP address assigned to that SEM Ethernet port
• The file-of-files (FOF) name for the SEM (sem1000.fof)
• The path for the FOF
• The network mask
The BOOTP reply is transferred using UDP.

Typical SEM BOOTP Packet Files

The BOOTP packet file mix is not fixed, as files are added/removed consistent with
SEM functionality enhancements. A typical list of files is as follows:

255
APPENDIX C — INITIALIZATION INFORMATION

Filename Purpose

sem1000.fof File of files that contains three field columns:

source path, destination path, and force flag.
Do not change the symbolic name of the SEM in
the second field, as it can cause an initialization
failure.

sem.cod Host application code for main SEM processor.

sem1000.ini Contains SEM configuration settings for

application firmware.

mancfg.ini Remapping configuration settings – holds

configuration settings when the SEM is internally
controlled (for example, Manual Routing, UDP
Mapping).

muxfpga.rbf Field programming gate array personality file for

Mux.

acpfpga.rbf Field programming gate array personality file for

ACPs.

semgbe.bin Executable code for broadcomm GigE processor.

semem.jar Executable SEM-EM Java based application.

Reference Specifications
To support TFTP, BOOTP, and DHCP, the SEM conforms to the following RFC
specifications:
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131
• DHCP Options and BOOTP Vendor Extensions, RFC 2132
• Bootstrap Protocol, RFC 951
• The TFTP Protocol, Revision 2, RFC 1350
• Clarifications and Extensions for the Bootstrap Protocol, RFC 1542
Refer to these specifications for complete information on the BOOTP packet format
and field descriptions.

HCT 1000 as BOOTP Server

If the HCT1000 is used as the BOOTP server, it must be set up with the SEM
parameters as listed in Table C-1.

256
APPENDIX C — INITIALIZATION INFORMATION

Table C-1 HCT 1000 SEM parameters

Item Boot Dir Boot File IP MAC Subnet Gateway

Name BOOTDIR BOOTFILE IPADDR MACADDR SUB-NET GATEWAY

Mask

Type FILE BOOTFILE IPADDR MACADDR IPADDR IPADDR

Data Source Local Value Local Value Local Local Value Local Local Value
Value Value

Value BOOTDIR/ SEM1000.fof **** **** **** ****

SEM/03_00.001

Description Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Write to Checked Checked Checked Un-checked Checked Un-checked

BOOTPVSA (graytone)

Tag Hd N/A (bf) Ip N/A Sm N/A

**** is your IP address or value.

257
APPENDIX D — FIELD FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A fan failure is indicated with a solid red STATUS LED on the SEM front panel. When
a fan fails, it must be replaced to ensure proper airflow and cooling within the SEM.
Fan replacement does not require powering down the SEM, as each fan plug can be
disconnected from its power connector on the SEM rear panel.
WARNING! Removal and replacement procedures have fan cover removed. Keep
hands away from fan blades and do not insert or drop objects into exposed fan
blades.

Fan Removal
Reference Figure D-1 to remove a fan:
1. Identify the failing fan, whose blade is not turning, on the rear panel of the SEM.
(A failing fan blade does not turn, whereas a marginal fan may have a rasping
sound that is definitely a pitch off and also surges in volume from the steady
hum of other fans. In a rack of SEMs, it is worthwhile identifying any marginal
fans to ensure adequate spares are available.)
2. Remove the four hex nuts and washers securing the fan cover to the fan. Save
these, as they must be re-installed on the new fan.
3. Slide the fan cover off of the four stand-offs.
4. Unplug the fan power cable from its connector.
5. Note the orientation of the fan cable. The fan blades face toward the SEM and
the rear of the fan motor faces away from the SEM. Slide the fan off of the four
stand-offs. Do not slide the base of the fan cover off of the stand-offs.

259
APPENDIX D — FIELD FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Figure D-1 Fan removal/replacement

AC
0V
24
-
0
10

As applicable,
ac or dc
connector

Replacement Fan Kit Assemblies

As shown in Figure D-2, the Motorola part numbers for a SEM replacement fan kit
assembly (one fan) are 492898-001 for fan 3 and 492898-002 for fans 1 and 2.
Figure D-2 Fan kit assemblies

FAN 2 Enet1
FAN 1

FAN 3

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Complies with 21 CFR

1040.10 and 1040.11

ALARM NC C NO RF #1 RF #2 RF #3 RF #4
Gigabit Ethernet
10/100
base-T
Ethernet
In I/O GigE1 GigE2 GigE3 Enet2
ASI-1 ASI-2 ASI-3 ASI-4 ASI-5 ASI-6 ASI-7 ASI-8

492898-002 492898-001

260
APPENDIX D — FIELD FAN REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Fan Replacement
To install a fan:
1. Rotate the fan motor so the cable is properly aligned with the connector and
slide it onto the four stand-offs. The fan blades should face toward the SEM; the
rear of the fan motor should face away from the SEM.
2. Connect the fan power cable to the connector.
3. Slide the fan cover over the body. The four stand-offs should pass through holes
on the fan cover.
4. Secure the fan cover in place with the four washers and hex nuts.
5. Ensure the replacement fan blade is turning. The front panel STATUS LED should
not be solid red.

261
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT
The RS-232 Test/Console Port is a menu driven interface available using any terminal
emulation program. The primary purpose of the menu is to configure the Internet
Protocol (IP) address of the Ethernet 1 network interface. Properly setting the IP
address is a prerequisite to using the SEM-EM. After the IP address has been
properly assigned, the SEM-EM should be used for all subsequent configuration
changes.
The RS-232 Test/Console Port is accessed by removing the clip-on bezel on the front
panel. It is a standard nine pin connector that accepts a nine pin straight through
cable.
Do not use a null-modem cable that swaps transmit and receive.

Establishing Communication with a PC

To initiate a port session with the SEM:
1. On the PC connected to the SEM, open a terminal emulation program (for
example, HyperTerminal).
2. Display the Communications Port window and select the following values:
• Bits per second: 9600
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: None
• Stop bits: 1
• Flow control: None
3. Click OK to close the window.
4. Press ENTER and the User Console Root Menu should be displayed.

Menu General Operations

To access a menu, type the menu number and press ENTER. Menu items that
display sub-menu items are marked with a “->” designator. Menu items that are not
marked are action items. Some action items require confirmation prior to
proceeding. When confirmation is required the word yes in all lowercase must be
provided, any other response is considered negative.
For convenience, the options Save Changes and Reboot Now are available on several
menus as well as the root menu. They work exactly the same regardless of the
menu from which they are called. They are only repeated to minimize required
navigation steps.

263
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT

Menu Selections:
Figure E-1 and Figure E-2 are summary illustrations of menu selections 1 through 7:
Figure E-1 Menu selections 1 through 3

User Console Root Menu

[0] Exit user console
[1] Show Enet1 Parameters
[2] Enet1 IP Setup (Fixed Config) ->
[3] Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols) ->
[4] Destructive Purge ->
[5] Reprogram ACP FPGA
[6] Show ACP Unit Addresses
[7] Reset SEM EM Username and Password
[8] Save Changes
[9] Reboot Now
Enter a selection 0-9:

Eth1 IP Parameter Display

Configuration Method: IP configuration via Bootp protocol
Select 1 MAC address: 00:0f:9f:2c:00:14
Default IP address: 168.84.247.115
Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway: 168.84.247.1

Enet1 IP Setup (Fixed Config) Menu

[0] Return the previous menu
[1] Set IP address
Select 2 [2] Set Subnet Mask
[3] Set Gateway IP
[4] Save Changes
[5] Reboot Now
Enter a selection 0-5:

Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols) Menu

[0] Return to previous menu
[1] Do not use boot protocols
Select 3 [2] Use DHCP to obtain config
[3] Use Bootp to obtain config
[4] Use DHCP use Bootp if DHCP fails
[5] Save Changes
[6] Reboot Now
Enter a selection 0-6:

264
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT

Figure E-2 Menu selections 4 through 7

User Console Root Menu

[0] Exit user console
[1] Show Enet1 Parameters
[2] Enet1 IP Setup (Fixed Config) ->
[3] Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols) ->
[4] Destructive Purge ->
[5] Reprogram ACP FPGA
[6] Show ACP Unit Addresses
[7] Reset SEM EM Username and Password
[8] Save Changes
[9] Reboot Now
Enter a selection 0-9:

Destructive Purge Menu

[0] Return to previous menu
[1] Erase All Software and Configuration Files
Select 4 [2] Erase Configuration Files
[3] Erase Application Software Files
[4] Erase All of NVRAM and Reboot (requires password)
[5] Erase All Commands Stored in NVRAM and Reboot
[6] Reboot Now
Enter a selection 0-6:

WARNING: This command will reprogram the ACP FPGA.

Select 5 A reboot is required to reprogram the ACP FPGA.
It takes about 15 minutes to reprogram the ACP FPGA.
To proceed type “yes” to confirm:

Index Unit-Address (Hex) Unit-Address (Label)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01 0012ab6538 000-03132-22456-129
Select 6 02 0012ab6539 000-03132-22457-026
* * *
* * *
* * *
24 0012ab654f 000-03132-22479-232

Select 7
This command will immediately reset the username and password.
Config File system will be saved to flash memory automatically.
Type “yes” to confirm:

265
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT

User Console Root Menu

From the User Console Root Menu, you can access:
1. Show Enet1 Parameters — a quick access display for the SEM MAC address and
ENET1 parameters (IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway addresses).
2. Enet1 IP Setup (Fixed Config) — provides access to the fixed IP configuration
Setup Menu.
3. Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols) — provides access to the dynamic IP
configuration Setup Menu.
4. Destructive Purge — provides access to the destructive purge submenu.
Entering this menu is not recommended. It is not necessary for configuration
under normal circumstances. It is only provided for extreme circumstances
where normal configuration fails due to unrecoverable errors.
5. Reprogram ACP FPGA — provides the ability to force the ACP FPGA to be
reprogrammed.
6. Show ACP Unit Addresses — a quick access display for the ACP Unit Addresses.
7. Reset SEM EM Username and Password — provides the ability to reset the
current username and password to the factory default values.
8. Save Changes — persists changes from RAM to flash. This allows the changes to
take effect on the next reboot.
9. Reboot Now — causes SEM to reboot immediately; changes in RAM not
persisted to flash are discarded.

Show Enet1 Parameters Menu (Root.1)

Provides immediate display of the SEM MAC address and ENET1 parameters.
The actual addresses displayed are network dependent.
Eth1 IP Parameter Display
Configuration Method: IP configuration via DHCP protocol.
Default IP address: 168.84.247.109
Default Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Default Gateway: 168.84.247.1

266
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT

Enet1 IP Setup (Fixed Config) Menu (Root.2)

This menu provides the capability to configure ENET1 with a fixed IP address and
configuration.
From this menu you can access:
1. Set IP address — specify the IP address for ENET1.
2. Set Subnet Mask — specify the subnet mask for the network to which ENET1 is
attached.
3. Set Gateway IP — specify a computer/server that will act as a gateway to other
network segments.
4. Save Changes — persists changes from RAM to flash. This allows the changes to
take effect on the next reboot.
5. Reboot Now — causes SEM to reboot immediately; changes in RAM not
persisted to flash are discarded.

Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols) Menu (Root.3)

This menu provides the capability to select a boot protocol, which is used to obtain
an IP address and configuration at boot time. From this menu you can access:
1. Do not use boot protocols — causes the SEM to use the fixed IP configuration
specified in the previous menu. This selection cannot be made if the SEM
configuration files or application files have been purged.
2. Use DHCP to obtain config — causes the SEM to send a DHCP request at boot.
If a DHCP reply is received, the SEM will use the IP configuration assigned by
the DHCP server.
3. Use Bootp to obtain config — causes the SEM to send a BOOTP request at
boot. If a BOOTP reply is received, the SEM will use the IP configuration
assigned by the BOOTP server.
4. Use DHCP use Bootp if DHCP fails — at boot, the SEM will attempt to obtain a
DHCP IP configuration as described above in [2]. If the DHCP request fails the
SEM will attempt to obtain an IP configuration using the BOOTP protocol as
described above in [3].
5. Save Changes — persists changes from RAM to flash. This allows the changes to
take effect on the next reboot.
6. Reboot Now — causes the SEM to reboot immediately; changes in RAM not
persisted to flash are discarded.

267
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT

Destructive Purge Menu (Root.4)

This menu should only be used as a last resort preferably under the direction of
Motorola BCS technical support. Indiscriminant use of this menu may cause the
SEM to become non-operational. The user must manually select the SEM to be
rebooted after selecting any of the options below. From this menu you can access:
1. Erase All Software and Configuration Files — destroys flash file system. This
includes all configuration files as well as the application software itself. Only the
boot ROM firmware is left intact. The boot ROM firmware will rebuild the file
system at the next reboot providing there is a BOOTP/DHCP server that will
provide the correct configuration and application software files. This selection
cannot be made if the boot method was previously set to None.
2. Erase Configuration Files — erases the SEM configuration files, including manual
mapping files. This should only be done when a new set of known configuration
files are to be loaded onto the SEM. This selection cannot be made if the boot
method was previously set to None.
3. Erase Application Software Files — erases all application files. This should only
be done when loading the SEM with new firmware. This selection cannot be
made if the boot method was previously set to None.
4. Erase All of NVRAM and Reboot — clears the entire contents of the NVRAM.
This deletes all stored Load SEM commands (commands from an external
controller such as a DAC 6000) and all other internal SEM configuration settings.
This menu option is password protected and should only be done by Motorola
Field Engineers. This option is only intended to be used as a method to purge
NVRAM in the case of inadvertent corruption. It is not intended to be used in any
normal SEM operation. The password for erasing is not provided to the customer
as this option should only be done by a Motorola FE.
5. Erase All Commands Stored in NVRAM and Reboot — This deletes all stored
Load SEM commands (commands from an external controller such as a
DAC 6000) and all other internal SEM configuration settings. Erasing commands
has no effect on the operation of the SEM when the SEM is internally controlled
(any of the VOD operating modes). The SEM will be immediately rebooted after
accepting, entering ‘yes’.
WARNING! Selection of any of the purge options may render the SEM inoperable.
Except for the erasing of NVRAM, a DHCP or BOOTP server must be available to
reload the SEM after the configuration files and/or application software files have
been erased.
WARNING! Selection [5], “Erase All Commands Stored in NVRAM will cause all
external controller commands in NVRAM to be erased on the next reboot of the
SEM. When externally controlled, the SEM will have to be reloaded with commands
before services or PIDs will be remultiplexed.

268
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT

REPROGRAM ACP FPGA MENU (ROOT.5)

This menu allows the user to force the ACP FPGA to be reprogrammed. Since the
SEM will detect when the ACP FPGA needs to be reprogrammed, selection of this
menu option is not necessary. This menu option is meant to allow a Motorola Field
Engineer to force the SEM to reload the ACP FPGA from its internally stored flash
image. The SEM must be rebooted prior to the ACP FPGA being reprogrammed.

Show ACP Unit Addresses Menu (Root.6)

This menu displays all of the ACP Unit Addresses of the SEM. Addresses are
displayed in hexadecimal and label formats.

Reset SEM EM User Name and Password Menu (Root.7)

This menu option allows a user to reset the SEM-EM username and password to the
factory default values (root, password). This menu is useful in the event a user
forgets the username and/or password previously defined for a SEM. The SEM does
not need to be rebooted for the username and password to be reset.

Typical Scenarios
Two typical scenarios are as follows:

Setup for DHCP or BOOTP Client Configuration

To use boot protocols like BOOTP or DHCP to automatically obtain the IP
configuration at boot-time:
1. Install a BOOTP/DHCP server on your network. Server configuration is beyond
the scope of this document. There are many Linux/UNIX/Windows™ solutions
available.
2. Add an entry into the BOOTP/DHCP server’s database so that it will respond to
your SEM. The servers use the MAC address of the requester to identify them.
You can obtain the MAC address of your SEM by selecting the Root.1 menu (or
from the label on the bottom of the unit).
3. From the Root menu, select [3] Enter the Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols). Select the
appropriate protocol for your server. Save the changes, and then reboot the SEM.
4. Verify that the SEM is using the IP configuration from the BOOTP/DHCP server’s
database.

Fixed IP Configuration
If using automatic protocols to manage the IP configurations is not desirable, the
SEM can be configured to run using a static configuration as follows:
1. From the Root menu, select [3] Enet1 IP Setup (via boot protocols).
2. From the protocol setup menu, select [1] Do not use boot protocols.
3. Select [0] Return to previous menu to thread back to the Root menu.
4. From the Root menu, select [2] Enet1 IP Setup (Fixed Config).

269
APPENDIX E — RS-232 TEST/CONSOLE PORT

5. Enter the following information items: IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway IP.
These are network topology dependent; therefore, in-house IT support may have
to provide these values.
6. Select [4] Save Changes.
7. Select [5] Reboot Now.

270
GLOSSARY

Abbreviations and Acronyms

AC alternating current
ACP Access Control Processor
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface
BSI Billing System Interface
BNC Bayonet, N-type, C-size connector
BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol
CA Conditional Access
CAS Conditional Access System
CAT conditional access table
CATV Cable Access Television (originally Community Antenna Television)
CBR constant bit rate
c/n carrier–to-noise
CPSI custom program specific information
CPSIG custom program specific information generator
CPU central processing unit
CRC cyclic redundancy check
CSA Common Scrambling Algorithm
CW continuous wave
CWG Control Word Generator
DAC 6000 Digital Addressable Controller 6000
DANIS Digital Addressable Network Interface Server
DC direct current
DCE data communication equipment
DCT digital consumer terminal (set-top)
DES Data Encryption Standard
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DQPSK digital quadrature phase shift keying
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

271
GLOSSARY

DHEI Digital Headend Expansion Interface

DID downstream insertion device
DLS download server
DRM Digital Rights Management
DSM-CC Digital Storage Media: Command and Control
DTE data termination equipment
DVB Digital Video Broadcast
DVi Digital Versatile interactive (set-top)
DWDM Dense Wave Division Multiplexing
ECM Entitlement Control Message
ECMG Entitlement Control Message Generator
E/I Encrypt/Insert
EIS Event Info Scheduler
EM Element Manager
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMM Entitlement Management Message
EMMG Entitlement Management Message Generator
EPG electronic program guide
ESD electrostatic discharge
FEC forward error correction
FIR finite impulse response
FOF file-of-files
fps frames per second
GigE Gigabit Ethernet
GUI graphic user interface
HCT 1000 Headend Configuration Tool 1000
HDM Headend Device Manager
HFC hybrid fiber coaxial
HSTM High Speed Transport Multiplex
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

272
GLOSSARY

IF intermediate frequency
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
INTFC interface
I/O Input/output
IP Internet Protocol
IPPV Impulse Pay-Per-View
IRD Integrated Receiver Decoder (Satellite IRD)
ISO International Standards Organization
ITEM 1000 Integrated Transport Encryption Multiplexer 1000
ITU International Telecommunications Union
JRE JAVA® Runtime Environment
LAN local area network
LED light-emitting diode
LNB low noise block
MAC media access control
MC MediaCipher
MCAS MediaCipher Conditional Access System
MIB management information base
MPE Multiple-Protocol Encapsulation
MPEG-2 Motion Picture Expert Group–2
MPS Modular Processing System
MPTS Multi-Program Transport Stream
MSP Message Stream Protocol
MUX multiplex
NDTC National Data Transmission Center
NEC National Electric Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NTP Network Time Protocol
NVMEM non-volatile memory
NVRAM non-volatile random-access memory
OAM&P Operation, administration, maintenance, and provisioning (Ethernet port)
OBTM out-of-band transport multiplex (receiver)

273
GLOSSARY

OM 1000 Out-of-Band Modulator 1000

OOB out-of-band
OSI open-system interconnection
PAT program association table
PC personal computer
PCM physical channel map
PCR program clock reference
PDU protocol data unit
PID packet identifier
PLL phase-locked loop
PMT program map table
PRKM Program Rekey Message
PSI program-specific information
PSIG Program Specific Information Generator
QAM quadrature amplitude modulation
QoS quality of service
QPSK quadrature phase shift keying
RADD 6000 Remote Addressable DANIS/DLS 6000
REMUX remultiplexer
RF radio frequency
RMS (rms) Root mean square
RPC remote procedure call
RPD 1000 Return Path Demodulator 1000
RSA return for service authorization
RM Resource Manage
RtEM Real Time Encryption Manager
RTP Real Time Protocol
RTSP Real Time Streaming Protocol
RU rack unit
SCC service control channel
SCP Simple connection Protocol
SCR system configuration requirements

274
GLOSSARY

SCS Simulcrypt Synchronizer

SCSI Small Computer System Interface
SEM 1000 SmartStream Encryptor Modulator 1000
SEM-EM SmartStream Encryptor Modulator Element Manager
SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable
SI service information
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SPTS Single Program Transport Stream
TAC TCI Addressable Computer
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TMX Translation Memory eXchange format
TRC Technical Response Center
TS transport stream
U/C up conversion
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UDP/IP User Datagram Protocol/Internet Protocol
UPM upstream MAC address
UPS universal power supply
URL universal resource locator
UTP unshielded twisted pair
UW unique word
VBR variable bit rate
VCM virtual channel map
VOD Video on Demand
WK working key
WKEM Working Key Epoch Message
XML Extensible Markup Language

275
GLOSSARY

Definitions of Terms
Boot File The file referenced in the BOOTFILE field of the BOOTP reply
message. A boot file provides configuration information for a
network device either by containing an executable code image
for the device or by listing the names of other files that contain
the code image and other configuration information.
Boot Image The configuration information delivered as the result of the
boot process. Includes all information derived from the BOOTP
reply, boot file, and associated hosts, services, and code files.
BOOTP Boot protocol. The communication protocol used to transfer
initialization information between digital headend network
elements and a central server. At power up, network elements
issue a BOOTP request. The BOOTP server receives the
request and responds with a BOOTP reply that specifies
startup information and operating parameters for the
requesting device.
BOOTP Reply Single-packet, multi-field boot protocol message transmitted in
UDP by a BOOTP server to provide a boot image to a network
device (BOOTP client).
BOOTP Request Single-packet, multi-field boot protocol message transmitted in
UDP by a network device (BOOTP client) to request a boot
from a BOOTP server.
Bootptab File A master data table used by the BOOTP server to create
BOOTP reply messages. The BOOTPtab file list configuration
information for all defined network devices. The HCT 1000
generates the BOOTPtab file automatically from information
you provide in device configuration files.
Conditional A table carried in the PID1 stream of a transport multiplex that
Access Table lists the PID numbers of all EMM streams in a transport
(CAT) multiplex and indexes each EMM stream to an EMM provider
ID.
Entitlement This message type enables digital set-tops to decrypt a
Management service. The MPEG-2-formatted messages carry system-wide
Message (EMM) information, such as Category Keys to specific set-tops, as well
as authorization privileges and related access control
information to specific or a group of set-tops. The RADD 6000
inserts these messages into the EMM datastream that is
distributed out-of-band.

276
GLOSSARY

Boot File The file referenced in the BOOTFILE field of the BOOTP reply
message. A boot file provides configuration information for a
network device either by containing an executable code image
for the device or by listing the names of other files that contain
the code image and other configuration information.
Forward Error An encoding technique applied to data before transmission to
Correction (FEC) reduce the number of errors introduced by transmission. The
receiving device decodes the FEC to recover the original data.
Data is formatted with extra error detection and correction bits
at the sending end of a transmission. The received bits are
used to detect and correct transmission errors.
Headend A General Instrument PC-based tool for provisioning network
Configuration devices in a digital CATV headend or broadband interactive
Tool (HCT 1000) network. The HCT 1000 helps set up embedded code images,
assign IP addresses to network devices, and set up start-up
parameters.
Internet Protocol This public standard address is used for packet- and
(IP) Address connection-type communications.
JAVA-Enabled A remote configuration tool that uses a multiplatform, object
Console oriented programming language.
local area A data communications network within a given area, such as a
network (LAN) control room, office, specific workplace, building, or building
cluster up to six miles wide (10 kilometers), but not using a
common carrier.
MAC address Media Access Control address. A proprietary address used for
upstream/downstream communications. This is the lower sub-
layer of the Data Link layer in the OSI model and is used to
describe the mechanisms used to arbitrate access to a shared
medium.
MPEG-2 An international standard (ISO/IEC 13818) for delivering
(MPEG-II) compressed digital video. MPEG-2 is broadcast quality at
704x480 pixels at 30 frames per second (fps) in North America
and 704x576 pixels at 25 fps in Europe. MPEG-2 is typically
compressed at higher than 5Mbs and intended for higher
quality broadcast uses.

277
GLOSSARY

Boot File The file referenced in the BOOTFILE field of the BOOTP reply
message. A boot file provides configuration information for a
network device either by containing an executable code image
for the device or by listing the names of other files that contain
the code image and other configuration information.
OAM&P A telephone industry acronym referring to operations,
administration, maintenance, and provisioning. The term refers
to software required to generate the reports and commands
needed to control all network equipment. The OAM&P port is a
network (Ethernet) port through which a device communicates
with the headend network. The OAM&P port is assigned a
hardware (MAC) address at the factory; this MAC address is
used for communication with the BOOTP server before the
network (IP) address is assigned to the port.
Packet Identifier A number assigned to MPEG transport packets to identify the
(PID) information stream to which they belong. The PID number is
assigned in the packet header, and all packets from the same
stream have the same PID number. A 13-bit number included
in MPEG-2 transport packet headers.
Quadrature A data modulation technique used to convert digital program
Amplitude information for delivery in cable TV systems over in-band
Modulation frequencies. A form of double sideband modulation. The data
(QAM) stream is split into two half-rate streams. One of the data
streams modulates a sine wave carrier, the other a cosine
carrier at the same frequency. The resultant signal resembles a
vestigial sideband signal with no pilot carrier present.
SONET Synchronous Optical Network: a CCITT telephone digital
transmission standard featuring a basic signaling rate of about
150 megabits per second and higher, using building blocks of
about 50 mbps. CCITT intended it as a way of harmonizing
international public telephone networks and tie them together
as one functional network. SONET derives a transmission
hierarchy from OC-1 (optical carrier one) through OC-48.
Transmission The basic communication protocol of the Internet. TCP/IP is a
Control two-layered protocol. The TCP layer breaks a data packet into
Protocol/Internet smaller packets that are transmitted over the Internet and
Protocol (TCP/IP) received by another TCP layer that reassembles the packets
into the original message. The IP layer ensures that each packet
has the sender's and the receiver's Internet address and will
get to the right destination.
User Datagram A transmission protocol that uses an IP address to identify the
Protocol (UDP) destination host and a port number to identify the destination
application.

278
Motorola, Inc.
101 Tournament Drive
Horsham, PA 19044 U.S.A.

http://www.motorola.com
538074-001-d
10/08